JP2024024063A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving game amusement.

SOLUTION: When a specific light emission performance is executed, there is a high probability that a game machine is controlled to be in an advantageous state. The game machine can execute performance control in which light emission means emits light in a mode according to the specific light emission performance continuously even during variable display corresponding to the specific light emission performance, and the light emission is completed at a predetermined completion timing before the variable display corresponding to the specific light emission performance is completed. When the light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission performance of the light emission means is not completed at the predetermined completion timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event, the game machine executes special completion control in which the light emission of the light emission means is completed at a specific completion timing later than the predetermined completion timing.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11-28

COPYRIGHT: (C)2024,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to advantageous conditions that are advantageous to players.

In conventional gaming machines, it is possible to notify the effect result by the movement of the movable body (effect image). There are methods that emphasize body movements (for example, see Patent Document 1). Further, some conventional game machines are capable of executing a pre-read notice (specific light emission effect) by causing a light emitting means provided in the game machine to emit light (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-99572 JP2016-105941A

There was room to improve the marketability of gaming machines having the functions and configurations described in Patent Documents 1 and 2.

This invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a movable body that is operable;
A light emitting means capable of emitting light;
a display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
Effect execution means capable of executing a specific display effect of displaying the specific display and a specific light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on a predetermined condition being satisfied;
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
A specific effect that notifies the result of the variable display by operating the movable object, and a suggestion that the specific effect is executed by operating the movable object before the specific effect is executed. It is possible to perform and,
performing the specific light emitting effect so that the light emission of the light emitting means is recognizable to the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect;
The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed,
The gaming machine is
Even during the variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, the light emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, and at a predetermined ending timing before the variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect ends. It is possible to control the effect to end the light emission,
If the light emission of the light emitting means in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission performance is not terminated at the predetermined end timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event, the light emitting means of the light emitting means may emit light at a specific end timing subsequent to the predetermined end timing. Perform special termination control to terminate the
It is characterized by
The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is movably provided,
A specific performance that notifies the performance result by operating the movable body (for example, movable body motion performance A or movable body motion performance B), and repeatedly moves the movable body before the specific performance is executed. Suggestive effects that suggest that the specific effect is to be executed (for example, movable body movement suggestion effect A or movable body movement suggestion effect B), and effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (a part that executes the variable display processing shown in 10-19);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
When executing the suggestion effect, the effect image for the movable body is not displayed, while when executing the specific effect, the effect image for the movable body is displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 to 10-35). As shown, while the movable body motion suggestion production B is executed, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is not displayed on the image display device 5, while the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion production B. ),
A specific image is displayed while the suggested effect is being executed, and the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach effect of super reach β1) If so, ally character B and enemy character A will be displayed, and ally character B and enemy character A will be enlarged and displayed, and if super reach β2 is in reach effect, ally character B and enemy character B will be (The part where the friendly character B and enemy character B are enlarged and displayed)
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, an effect image for the specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, the image display device 5, the part that displays the effect image 109SG005X),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in Figure 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2, in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach performance, (The part where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect execution means is different from the update cycle of the specific image and the effect image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms, whereas the update period of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms),
The enlargement speed in the enlarged display is different between the first timing in the enlarged display and the second timing after the first timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, portions where the enlargement speed differs between the display period and the second enlarged display period),
The operating speed of the movable body in the suggestive effect is the same at the first timing and the second timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. (portion where the operating speed of the movable body 109SG401 is the same in the 2 enlarged display periods),
moreover,
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., pending display and active display) corresponding to the variable display;
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
A specific display effect that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a part that displays a pending display or an active display in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ) ), and a specific light emitting effect (for example, a flash effect when winning a prize) that causes the light emitting means to emit light,
In the specific display effect, the specific light emission effect is executed so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed (for example, FIG. 11-28, FIG. 11- As shown in 29(A) to FIG. 11-32(H) and FIG. 11-49(A) to FIG. 11-50(D), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts before the pending display is completed. (the part that lights up),
The rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emitting effect is executed than when the specific light emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-24, when the winning flash effect is executed, (If the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning, the percentage of control to be in the jackpot gaming state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed)
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g. winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g. main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body). lamp 9d);
The first light emitting means includes a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous period winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous period winning flash effect); A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect (for example, from the start of the late winning flash effect to the start timing of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F has a brightness of C1 and (The part that blinks at cycle T1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the brightness is C2 and blinks at cycle T2),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner that corresponds to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner that corresponds to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, in FIG. 11-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d flash at a brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period. During the period, the part that blinks at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the enlarged display of a specific image and the effect movement of the movable body even more conspicuous by using the effect image, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. Furthermore, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. By causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, it is possible to make the specific light emitting effect more conspicuous. This makes it even easier for players to recognize.

Moreover, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include the invention according to the following means 2. Conventionally, in gaming machines, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (entering the starting area of the game ball) as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-38019, a specific display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition ( A pending display or an active display) can be displayed on the display means, and a pre-read notice indicating that the variable display will be controlled in an advantageous state even before the start of the variable display can be executed for the variable display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. There is something. Furthermore, some conventional gaming machines are capable of giving a pre-read notice (specific light emitting effect) by emitting light from a light emitting means provided in the gaming machine.

However, depending on the timing at which the display of the specific display is started and the timing at which the specific light emission effect is started, it may become difficult for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect.

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to easily recognize a specific display that is a target of a specific light emission effect.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., pending display and active display) corresponding to the variable display;
A specific display effect that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a part that displays a pending display or an active display in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ) ), and a specific light emitting effect (for example, a flash effect when winning a prize) that causes the light emitting means to emit light;
Equipped with
The effect executing means executes the specific light emitting effect so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIG. -28, as shown in Figures 11-29 (A) to 11-32 (H), and Figures 11-49 (A) to 11-50 (D), before the display of the pending display is completed. The part that lights up the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning a prize),
The rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emitting effect is executed than when the specific light emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-24, when the winning flash effect is executed, (If the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning, the percentage of control to be in the jackpot gaming state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed)
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g. winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g. main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body). lamp 9d);
The first light emitting means includes a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous period winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous period winning flash effect); A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect (for example, from the start of the late winning flash effect to the start timing of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F has a brightness of C1 and (The part that blinks at cycle T1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the brightness is C2 and blinks at cycle T2),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner that corresponds to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner that corresponds to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, in FIG. 11-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d flash at a brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period. During the period, the part that blinks at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect In this case, the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous by causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the specific display.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a schematic diagram of a movable body unit. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the production control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of winning random value determination processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display pattern and the presence or absence of execution of a pre-read notice effect. It is a figure which shows the update example of a 1st pending storage display area and a 2nd pending storage display area. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a variable display control timer and a movable body control timer. It is a timing chart in variable display of super reach α1 jackpot and super reach α2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in variable display of super reach α1 being off and super reach α2 being off. It is a timing chart in variable display of super reach β1 jackpot and super reach β2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in variable display of super reach β1 being off and super reach β2 being off. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the presence or absence of a movable object suggesting motion and the image enlargement rate in each enlarged display period. (A) is a diagram showing a presentation mode of each movable body motion suggestion presentation, and (B) is a diagram showing a presentation mode of each movable body motion suggestion presentation. It is a figure which shows the performance mode up to the reach performance in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the image display device. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the production control data holding area, (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning, and (C) is the configuration of the active display buffer. It is a figure which shows an example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of winning random value determination processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. It is a part of a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display pattern and the presence or absence of execution of the pending display notice effect as a pre-read notice. It is a part of a flowchart which shows an example of specific display start effect execution processing. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the specific display start performance A. It is a diagram showing a performance mode of specific display start performance B. It is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process. It is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing presentation modes of a flash effect at the time of winning in the first period and a flash effect at the time of winning in the second period. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. (A) is a front view of the pachinko game machine with the game effect lamp lit at high brightness (C1), and (B) is a front view of the pachinko game machine with the game effect lamp turned off. be. A front view of the pachinko gaming machine in a state where the game effect lamp is lit at low brightness (C2) and a pachinko game machine showing the transition of the light emission mode of the game effect lamp when the game effect lamp is lit at low brightness. FIG. When a starting winning that is eligible for the winning flash effect occurs, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, the lighting of the winning flash lamp, the game effect lamp, and the starting gate lamp, and the timing of displaying the effect image and silhouette image. FIG. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. In the case of a starting winning that is subject to the winning flash effect in the modified example, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, the lighting of the winning flash lamp, the game effect lamp, and the starting gate lamp, and the display of the effect image and silhouette image. 3 is a timing chart showing the timing of . It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a timing chart showing the timing of the lighting of the winning flash lamp, the game effect lamp, and the starting port lamp, the display of the effect image and the silhouette image, and the operation of the movable body in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. It is a timing chart showing the timing of displaying a flash lamp and a silhouette image at the time of winning in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. They are a timing chart showing the timing of the operation of the winning flash lamp and the movable body in a modified example, and a diagram showing the determination ratio of the timing at which the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp changes. It is a figure which shows the display mode of a hold display and an active display in a modification, the suggestion content of each display mode, and the selection ratio at the time of the winning slash effect execution decision. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating presentation modes in a hold display and an active display when a winning flash effect is executed in a modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating presentation modes in a hold display and an active display when a winning flash effect is executed in a modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating presentation modes in a hold display and an active display when a winning flash effect is executed in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

[form]
Type 1 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is movably provided,
A specific performance that notifies the performance result by operating the movable body (for example, movable body motion performance A or movable body motion performance B), and repeatedly moves the movable body before the specific performance is executed. Suggestive effects that suggest that the specific effect is to be executed (for example, movable body movement suggestion effect A or movable body movement suggestion effect B), and effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (a part that executes the variable display processing shown in 10-19);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
When executing the suggestion effect, the effect image for the movable body is not displayed, while when executing the specific effect, the effect image for the movable body is displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 to 10-35). As shown, while the movable body motion suggestion production B is executed, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is not displayed on the image display device 5, while the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion production B. ),
A specific image is displayed while the suggested effect is being executed, and the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach effect of super reach β1) If so, ally character B and enemy character A will be displayed, and ally character B and enemy character A will be enlarged and displayed, and if super reach β2 is in reach effect, ally character B and enemy character B will be (The part where the friendly character B and enemy character B are displayed in an enlarged manner)
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, an effect image for the specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, the image display device 5), the part that displays the effect image 109SG005X),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in Figure 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2, in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach performance, (The part where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect execution means is different from the update cycle of the specific image and the effect image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1ms, whereas the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the enlarged display of a specific image and the effect movement of the movable body even more conspicuous by using the effect image, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
The enlargement speed in the enlarged display is different between the first timing in the enlarged display and the second timing after the first timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, portions where the enlargement speed differs between the display period and the second enlarged display period),
The operating speed of the movable body in the suggestion effect is the same at the first timing and the second timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 2. Part where the operating speed of the movable body 109SG401 is the same in the enlarged display period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of enlarged display and to reduce the control load related to the operation of the movable body.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is the gaming machine described in Form 1 or Form 2,
A non-enlargement period during which the specific image is not enlarged after the second timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, a movable body movement effect or a miss notification effect starts from the end timing of the enlarged display period) period until the timing),
The display mode during the non-enlargement period is different from the display mode immediately before the non-enlargement period (for example, in Modification 109SG-2, after the enlarged display period ends, the image display device 5 does not display a specific effect or display an effect image. (The portion where the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 is made different from that immediately before the end of the enlarged display period by displaying, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that it is a non-expansion period.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is the gaming machine described in Form 2 or Form 3,
The effect execution means is capable of gradually enlarging and displaying the specific image even after the repeated operation of the movable body is completed (for example, in the third enlarged display period shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24). (the part that performs enlarged display),
The enlargement speed at the second timing is slower than the enlargement speed at the first timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the second enlarged display period is larger than the first enlarged display period). slow part),
The enlargement speed of the enlarged display after the repeated operation of the movable body is completed is slower than the enlargement speed at the second timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, (3) Enlarged display period is a portion where the enlargement speed is slower than the second enlarged display period)
According to this feature, since the enlarged display of the specific image continues even after the repetitive motion of the movable body is finished, the game enjoyment can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is the gaming machine described in Forms 1 to 4,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to perform a preview performance (for example, a pre-read preview performance) that foretells that the control will be controlled in an advantageous state,
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, the execution of the preview effect is restricted (for example, as shown in Figures 10-21 to 10-24, the advance preview effect is restricted during the reach effect including the enlarged display period). (part that restricts execution)
The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4, characterized in that:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from decreasing to a specific image due to the execution of the preview effect.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is the gaming machine described in Forms 1 to 5,
The effect executing means may be arranged such that the visibility of the specific image differs between when operating the movable body in the suggestive effect and when operating the movable body in the specific effect (for example, FIGS. 10-32 and 10-32). As shown in FIG. 34, the player can see the reach effect while the movable body motion suggestion effect B is being executed, but as shown in FIGS. is the part where the visibility of the reach effect is reduced due to the explosion effect image 109SG005B being displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of a specific image changes depending on the operating state of the movable body, so it becomes easy to understand whether the motion is a suggestive performance motion or a specific performance motion, and it is also possible to distinguish between the movable body and the specific image. The degree of attention can be adjusted.

The gaming machine of Form 7 is the gaming machine described in Forms 1 to 6,
The effect execution means is capable of displaying a first effect image for the movable body and a second effect image for the specific image (for example, in Modified Example 109SG-3, the image display device 5 displays a first effect image for the movable body and a second effect image for the specific image). A part that can display both the explosion effect image 109SG005B according to the action and the effect image according to the progress of the battle performance),
The sizes of the first effect image and the second effect image are different (for example, as a modified example 109SG-3, the effect image 109SG005B of an explosion corresponding to the movement of a movable body and the effect image corresponding to the progress of a battle production) (parts that differ in size)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to display an effect image of an appropriate size corresponding to the difference between the movable object and the specific image.

The gaming machine of Form 8 is the gaming machine described in Forms 1 to 7,
The effect execution means is capable of displaying a first effect image for the movable body and a second effect image for the specific image (for example, in Modified Example 109SG-3, the image display device 5 displays a first effect image for the movable body and a second effect image for the specific image). A part that can display both the explosion effect image 109SG005B according to the action and the effect image according to the progress of the battle performance),
The image transparency of the first effect image and the image transparency of the second effect image are different (for example, as a modified example 109SG-3, the effect image 109SG005B of an explosion according to the movement of a movable body and the progress of a battle production (The part where the image transparency differs from the corresponding effect image)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to display an effect image with an appropriate image transparency corresponding to the difference between the movable object and the specific image.

Type 9 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is movably provided,
A specific performance that notifies the performance result by operating the movable body (for example, movable body motion performance A or movable body motion performance B), and repeatedly moves the movable body before the specific performance is executed. Suggestive effects that suggest that the specific effect is to be executed (for example, movable body movement suggestion effect A or movable body movement suggestion effect B), and effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (a part that executes the variable display processing shown in 10-19);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
When executing the specific effect, a specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach effect of super reach β1, ally character B and enemy The part that displays character A, and displays ally character B and enemy character B during the reach performance of super reach β2),
The motion of the movable body in the suggested performance is ended a predetermined period of time before the timing at which the movable body is started to operate in the specific performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, the movable body (a part where the movable body motion suggestion performance ends before the period T3 before the start of the motion performance execution),
Different types of performance sounds can be output before and after the predetermined period (for example, as shown in Figures 10-21 and 10-23, during execution of the moving body motion suggestion performance, BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R). , SE, the part that outputs BGM, SE, and jackpot notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R while the movable body movement performance is being performed).
The types of effect sounds during the predetermined period are smaller than the types of effect sounds that were output immediately before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, during period T3 is the part where only SE is output from speakers 8L and 8R),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in Figure 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2, in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach performance, (The part where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect execution means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms). In contrast, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the type of performance sound changes before and after the predetermined period when the movable body does not move.

The gaming machine of form 10 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is movably provided,
A specific performance that notifies the performance result by operating the movable body (for example, movable body motion performance A or movable body motion performance B), and repeatedly moves the movable body before the specific performance is executed. Suggestive effects that suggest that the specific effect is to be executed (for example, movable body movement suggestion effect A or movable body movement suggestion effect B), and effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (a part that executes the variable display processing shown in 10-19);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
When executing the specific effect, a specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach effect of super reach β1, ally character B and enemy The part that displays character A, and displays ally character B and enemy character B during the reach performance of super reach β2),
The motion of the movable body in the suggested performance is ended a predetermined period of time before the timing at which the movable body is started to operate in the specific performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, the movable body (a part where the movable body motion suggestion performance ends before the period T3 before the start of the motion performance execution),
The predetermined period is a period longer than the execution period of one unit motion in which the movable body is repeatedly operated, and shorter than a period in which the movable body is repeatedly operated in the suggestion performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, the period T3 is longer than the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position),
The operation period of the movable body in the specific performance is longer than the period in which the movable body is repeatedly operated in the suggestion performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the period T3 is , a portion that is shorter than the period T2 during which the movable body motion suggestion performance is executed),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in Figure 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2, in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach performance, (The part where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect execution means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms). In contrast, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent movements in a specific performance from being mistakenly recognized as movements in a suggestion performance, and also to prevent the period of suggestion from being longer than the period of movement of the movable body in the specific performance of the suggestion target. It is also possible to prevent a decline in interest due to such factors.

The gaming machine of form 11 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is movably provided,
A specific performance that notifies the performance result by operating the movable body (for example, movable body motion performance A or movable body motion performance B), and repeatedly moves the movable body before the specific performance is executed. Suggestive effects that suggest that the specific effect is to be executed (for example, movable body movement suggestion effect A or movable body movement suggestion effect B), and effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (a part that executes the variable display processing shown in 10-19);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
When executing the specific effect, a specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach effect of super reach β1, ally character B and enemy The part that displays character A, and displays ally character B and enemy character B during the reach performance of super reach β2),
The motion of the movable body in the suggested performance is ended a predetermined period of time before the timing at which the movable body is started to operate in the specific performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, the movable body (a part where the movable body motion suggestion performance ends before the period T3 before the start of the motion performance execution),
During the predetermined period, at least the visibility of the background image is set to a first low visibility state (for example, as a modification example 109SG-4, after the movable body motion suggestion performance and enlarged display period have ended, the movable body motion performance or miss notification is performed). During the period up to the start timing of the performance, the contrast and brightness on the image display device 5 are set to a first low visibility state lower than before the end of the enlarged display period),
When the movable body starts operating after the predetermined period, a second low visibility state is set in which the visibility is lower than the first low visibility state (for example, as a modification 109SG04, the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5 are changed). (a portion in which the visibility of the friendly character and the enemy character is further reduced by changing the first low visibility state to a second low visibility state that is even lower),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in Figure 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2, in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach performance, (The part where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect execution means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms). In contrast, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that it is a predetermined period of time, and it is also possible to increase attention to the movement of the movable body in the specific performance.

The gaming machine according to Form 12 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is movably provided,
A specific performance that notifies the performance result by operating the movable body (for example, movable body motion performance A or movable body motion performance B), and repeatedly moves the movable body before the specific performance is executed. Suggestive effects that suggest that the specific effect is to be executed (for example, movable body movement suggestion effect A or movable body movement suggestion effect B), and effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (a part that executes the variable display processing shown in 10-19);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
It is possible to display a specific image while executing the specific effect and when executing the suggestive effect, and to gradually enlarge and display the specific image while executing the suggestive effect (for example, As shown in Figures 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach performance of Super Reach β1, ally character B and enemy character A are displayed, and these ally character B and enemy character A are enlarged. and, during the reach performance of Super Reach β2, ally character B and enemy character B are displayed, and these ally character B and enemy character B are enlarged).
The motion of the movable body in the suggested performance is ended a predetermined period of time before the timing at which the movable body is started to operate in the specific performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, the movable body (a part where the movable body motion suggestion performance ends before the period T3 before the start of the motion performance execution),
The movement of the movable body is started before the specific image is gradually enlarged (for example, as shown in Modification 109SG-1, the movable body is moved at a timing before starting the enlarged display of the friendly character and the enemy character). (The part that performs body movement suggestion)
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in Figure 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2, in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach performance, (The part where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect execution means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms). In contrast, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that it is a predetermined period of time, and it is also possible to increase attention to the repetitive motion of the movable body in the suggestive performance.

The gaming machine of Form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 9 to 12,
The movable body has a light emitting part (for example, movable body LED109SG495) that can emit light,
The effect execution means controls the light emitting unit to a non-emission state during the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, from the end of the third enlarged display period, the movable body movement effect or (The part that turns off the movable LED109SG495 during the period until the start of the failure notification performance)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that it is a predetermined period in which the movable body is not operating.

The gaming machine of Form 14 is the gaming machine described in Forms 1 to 13,
The movable body includes a first movable body (for example, a first movable body 109SG401) and a second movable body (for example, a second movable body 109SG402L and a third movable body 109SG402R) that can operate independently of the first movable body. including
The performance execution means is
In the repetitive motion of the suggested effect, only one of the first movable body or the second movable body is operated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, the movable body motion suggestion effect B Now, the part that moves only the first movable body 109SG401),
In the operation of the specific performance, both the first movable body and the second movable body are operated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-35, in movable body motion performance B, the first movable body and the second movable body are The part that operates all of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily distinguish whether the motion of the movable body is a motion of a suggestive effect or a motion of a specific effect.

The gaming machine of Form 15 is the gaming machine described in Forms 1 to 14,
The movable body has a light emitting part (for example, movable body LED109SG495) that can emit light,
The performance execution means is
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, the light emitting section is caused to emit light at a first brightness (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, during the first enlarged display period and during the second In the enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period, the movable LED 109SG495 is made to emit light at a brightness C1),
In the specific performance, at least during the period in which the performance result is announced, the light emitting unit is caused to emit light at a second brightness that is higher than the first brightness (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23). , while the movable body movement performance is being executed, the movable body LED 109SG495 is made to emit light at a brightness C2 that is higher than the brightness C1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier to recognize that it is the period in which the performance results are shown, and the interest of the period can also be improved.

The gaming machine of form 16 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is movably provided,
A specific performance that notifies the performance result by operating the movable body (for example, movable body motion performance A or movable body motion performance B), and repeatedly moves the movable body before the specific performance is executed. Suggestive effects that suggest that the specific effect is to be executed (for example, movable body movement suggestion effect A or movable body movement suggestion effect B), and effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (a part that executes the variable display processing shown in 10-19);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
It is possible to display a specific image while executing the specific effect and when executing the suggestive effect, and to gradually enlarge and display the specific image while executing the suggestive effect (for example, As shown in Figures 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach performance of Super Reach β1, ally character B and enemy character A are displayed, and these ally character B and enemy character A are enlarged. (The part that displays ally character B and enemy character B during the reach effect of Super Reach β2, and enlarges and displays these ally character B and enemy character B)
When the movable body is operated in the suggestive effect, it is possible to display a different type of effect image from the effect image displayed when the movable body is operated in the specific effect (for example, , as a modified example 109SG-5, a part where different effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body movement effect and during execution of the movable body movement effect),
In the suggestive effect, the number of types of effect images displayed when the movable body is operated is greater than the number of types of effect images displayed when the movable body is operated in the specific effect. (For example, as a modified example 109SG-5, the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect. (the part that is larger than the number of types of directed images),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in Figure 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2, in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach performance, (The part where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect execution means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms). In contrast, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, many types of effect images are displayed during the suggestive performance in which an action is repeated, so that the interest during the suggestive performance can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 17 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is movably provided,
A specific performance that notifies the performance result by operating the movable body (for example, movable body motion performance A or movable body motion performance B), and repeatedly moves the movable body before the specific performance is executed. Suggestive effects that suggest that the specific effect is to be executed (for example, movable body movement suggestion effect A or movable body movement suggestion effect B), and effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (a part that executes the variable display processing shown in 10-19);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
In the suggestive performance, it is possible to display a suggestive motion corresponding image corresponding to the motion of the movable body (for example, as modification example 109SG-6, during execution of the movable body motion suggestive performance, the image display device 5 displays a suggestive motion corresponding to the motion of the movable body. (a part that displays an image corresponding to a movable body motion suggestion production corresponding to a motion suggestion production),
In the specific performance, it is possible to display a performance motion corresponding image corresponding to the motion of the movable body (for example, as a modified example 109SG-6, while the movable body motion performance is being performed, the image display device 5 displays the motion of the movable body). (a portion displaying an image different from the movable body action suggestion production compatible image as a movable body motion production compatible image corresponding to the production);
The period during which the suggested motion compatible image is displayed is different from the period during which the performance motion compatible image is displayed (for example, as a variation 109SG-6, the display period of the movable body motion suggestive performance compatible image and the movable body motion compatible image are parts that vary the display period of images),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in Figure 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2, in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach performance, (The part where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect execution means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms). In contrast, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display period of the suggestive action corresponding image and the production action corresponding image can be set to a period corresponding to each movement of the movable body.

The gaming machine of Form 18 is the gaming machine described in Form 17,
When displaying the performance action compatible image, the performance execution means controls the display to a low visibility state in which visibility is reduced (for example, as modification example 109SG-6, the display device 5 displays the movable body motion performance compatible image). When displayed, the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5 are lowered to reduce the visibility of the movable body motion effect image)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase attention to the movable body that moves in a specific performance.

The gaming machine of Form 19 is the gaming machine described in Form 17 or Form 18,
The performance execution means is
During the period in which the suggesting action corresponding image is displayed, it is possible to output a suggesting action corresponding sound corresponding to the suggesting action corresponding image (for example, as a modified example 109SG-6, the movable body action suggesting effect corresponding image is displayed on the image display device 5). When displaying, a part that outputs a sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance compatible image from the speaker 8L8R),
During the period of displaying the performance action corresponding image, it is possible to output a performance sound corresponding to the performance action corresponding image, which is different from the suggested action corresponding sound (for example, as modified example 109SG-6). , when displaying an image compatible with movable body motion performance on the image display device 5, a part that outputs a sound corresponding to the movable body motion performance corresponding to the image compatible with the movable body motion performance from the speaker 8L8R)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to output sounds corresponding to each corresponding image displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 17 to 19,
The effect execution means is characterized in that it displays the image corresponding to the effect action before the start timing of the movement of the movable body in the specific effect.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase expectations for the start of the movement of the movable body in a specific performance, and it is also possible to further increase attention to the movement of the movable body.

The gaming machine of form 21 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is movably provided,
A specific performance (for example, movable body movement performance A) that notifies the performance result by operating the movable body, and operating the movable body by displaying a special image before the specific performance is executed. A suggestive effect that suggests that the specific effect will be executed without any action (for example, on the image display device 5, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1. body motion suggestion performance A);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
In the suggestion effect, the special image is displayed in a manner approaching the movable body at a first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, when executing the movable body motion effect A, , in the image display device 5, a portion where a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed so as to move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1),
In the specific effect, the special image is displayed in such a manner that it moves away from the movable object at a second speed faster than the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 and 10-31, When body motion production A is executed, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 so as to move from the first movable body 109SG401 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. part),
During the display period of the special image, at least the background image is displayed in a low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, during execution of movable body motion suggestion effect is a portion where images of friendly character A and enemy character A or enemy character B are displayed with lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period),
When executing the specific effect, a specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 10-28 and 10-30, during the reach effect of super reach α1, ally character A and enemy The part that displays character A, and displays ally character A and enemy character B during the reach performance of Super Reach α2),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in Figure 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2, in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach performance, (The part where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect execution means is different from the update cycle of the special image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms). In contrast, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the special image stand out, and also to draw attention to the movable body by moving the special image, so it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the movement of the movable body, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. can.

The gaming machine of form 22 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is movably provided,
A specific performance (for example, movable body movement performance A) that notifies the performance result by operating the movable body, and the movable body gradually approaches the movable body at a first speed before the specific performance is executed. Suggestive effects that suggest that the specific effect is executed without operating the movable body by displaying a special image (for example, on the image display device 5, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed at a speed of V1) The movable body motion suggestion effect A) of moving toward the movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1, and the effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 10-19) part) and
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
In the suggestive effect, the special image is displayed in a manner that acts repeatedly at a first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, when the movable body movement effect A is executed, the image display In the device 5, a portion where a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed as moving toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1),
In the specific effect, the special image is displayed in such a manner that it moves away from the movable object at a second speed faster than the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 and 10-31, When body motion production A is executed, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 so as to move from the first movable body 109SG401 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. part),
During the display period of the special image, effect images other than the special image are displayed in a low-visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, a moving object motion suggesting effect During the execution of A, the images of friendly character A and enemy character A or enemy character B are displayed with lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period),
When executing the specific effect, a specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 10-28 and 10-30, during the reach effect of super reach α1, ally character A and enemy The part that displays character A, and displays ally character A and enemy character B during the reach performance of super reach β2),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in Figure 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2, in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach performance, (The part where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect execution means is different from the update cycle of the special image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms). In contrast, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the special image stand out, and also to draw attention to the movable body by moving the special image, so it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the movement of the movable body, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. can.

The gaming machine of Form 23 is the gaming machine according to Form 21 or Form 22,
The performance execution means hides the special image for a predetermined period immediately before the start timing of the movable body in the specific performance (as shown in FIGS. 10-28(F) and 10-30(F)). (Before executing the movable body movement effect A or the deviation notification effect, the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is not displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the special image is not displayed, it is possible to easily recognize that the movement of the movable body is started.

The gaming machine of Form 24 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 21 to 23,
The first speed is a speed within a predetermined range, and within the predetermined range, the first speed changes according to the proximity of the special image (for example, as shown in Modification Example 109SG-7, the first speed is a speed within a predetermined range). (variable within the range),
The second speed is a speed faster than the maximum speed in the predetermined range (for example, as shown in modification example 109SG-7, the speed of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S when moving body motion production A is executed) Regarding V2, the part where the speed is faster than the maximum speed of speed V1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the moving speed of the special image changes, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 25 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 21 to 24,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to output a plurality of motion sound effects corresponding to the repeated motion of the movable body or the motion of the special image (for example, output a plurality of sounds as motion suggestion sounds and jackpot notification sounds output from speakers 8L and 8R). possible part),
It is possible to output different action sound effects depending on the output timing (for example, by setting multiple output start timings of the action suggestion sound and jackpot notification sound, and determining at which timing the output of the action suggestion sound and jackpot notification sound starts. (The part that can output different sounds from speakers 8L and 8R depending on the situation)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the repeating motion of the movable body or the motion of the special image is being executed, and since the motion sound effect changes depending on the output timing, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern game using the normal pattern display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as special symbols for "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value is assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result is the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and will be controlled in a small win game state, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is the set value, just as when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (to execute a predetermined production every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It may also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return to the initial position, and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 109SG)
Next, the feature section 109SG (hereinafter abbreviated as main feature section 109SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 109SG. As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this feature section 109S, a movable unit 109SG400 is provided between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 provided on the back side thereof. .

The movable unit 109SG400 has a base 109SG410, as shown in FIG. 10-3(A). A first movable body 109SG401 is located at the center of the base 109SG410 in the left and right width direction, a second movable body 109SG402L is located at the left of the base 109SG410 in the left and right width direction, and a second movable body 109SG402L is located at the right side of the base 109SG410 in the left and right width direction. A third movable body 109SG402R is arranged respectively.

The movable body unit 109SG400 also includes a first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body motor 109SG422 for operating the second movable body 109SG402L, and a third movable body motor 109SG422 for operating the second movable body 109SG402L. It has a third movable body motor 109SG423 for operating the movable body 109SG402R. For this reason, the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R in this feature section 109SG can operate independently from the first movable body 109SG401. Furthermore, a movable body LED 109SG495 is built in a predetermined position of the first movable body 109SG401 (for example, an upper position of the first movable body 109SG401).

Of these first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved to the retracted position, which is the lower position of the image display device 5, by the drive of the first movable body motor 109SG421. (see FIG. 10-3(A)), a suggested position above the retracted position (see FIG. 10-3(B)), an effect that is above the suggested position and is also the front position of the image display device 5. It can be moved to any position (see Figure 10-3(C)).

The second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the retracted position (FIG. 10 10-3(A)) to a position adjacent to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 (see FIG. 10-3(C)).

In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-3(A) to 10-3(C), the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are all in the retracted position. The first state of the movable unit 109SG400 is that the first movable body 109SG401 is in the suggested position, while the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are in the retracted position. The state is the second state of the movable body unit 109SG400, the first movable body 109SG401 is located at the production position, and the first movable body 109SG401 is located at the production position. The state in which the movable body unit 109SG400 is located at the left and right adjacent positions is defined as the third state of the movable body unit 109SG400.

FIG. 10-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in the feature section 109SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 10-4(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command determines whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss", "big hit", or "small hit", as shown in Figure 10-4 (B), for example. Different EXT data is set depending on the result (predetermined result) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variable. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or a small winning.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, for example, in response to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open jackpot state and the high speed open jackpot state, which will be described later, Different EXT data is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH and command C6XXH are production control commands (winning determination result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning determination result. Among these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or not, the jackpot type (probable variable or non-probable variable), and a small hit as the winning determination result. . In addition, the command C6XXH is a fluctuation category command that indicates whether the random value for fluctuation pattern determination is a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" fluctuation pattern as a winning determination result. It is.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 10-4(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may be omitted. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-5, in this feature section 109SG, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and the random number MR4 for determining the display result of the ordinary figure are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting section 109SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " Takes a value in the range of ``997''.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 10-6(A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 109SG, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result into a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature section 109SG, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the special figure display result is treated as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot gaming state. This is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this feature section 109SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), there are more decision values than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 109SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 109SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that the control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability of winning, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Further, FIG. 10-6(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a "small win" game state as a "small win". This is the table referenced for this purpose.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this feature section 109SG, regardless of whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether to control the special figure display result to a "small hit" game state as a "small hit". This is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 109SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different depending on the first special figure game and the second special figure game. There is. Specifically, if it is a special game of the first special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but if it is a special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value has been assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the time saving control is executed to generate the second starting winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In the high base state where winnings occur and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hits" almost never occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter a prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which many game balls cannot be obtained, thereby preventing the game interest from decreasing.

FIG. 10-7(A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 109SG selects one of multiple jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which a variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A). 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 109SG using FIG. 10-7(B), in this feature section 109SG, high accuracy control and time saving control are set as jackpot types after the end of the jackpot game state. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "Probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and move to a high-precision high base state, and a high-probability low base state in which high-precision control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. A "probable variable jackpot C" that transitions, and a "non-probable variable jackpot" that transitions to a low-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state where only the time saving control is executed are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . The jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds). . In addition, in the jackpot game state of "probable variable jackpot C" and "non-probable variable jackpot", rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds). It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. Sometimes called.

Also, although not particularly shown, the small winning game state in the feature section 109SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state advantageous to the player, and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. It has become. Furthermore, after the small winning game ends, the gaming state immediately before the small winning game is carried over.

The high probability control and time saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot are continuously performed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a variable probability jackpot, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state occurs continuously without going through the normal state. , resulting in a so-called consecutive housing situation.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature section 109SG), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special drawing is the first special drawing or the second special drawing, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special pattern game using the second special pattern, the jackpot type is not determined to be controlled to a normal open jackpot state or a high speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds, such as "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a gaming state where game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state where few prize balls are obtained can be avoided. This makes it possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 10-7 (A), the assignment of the determination value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is the same, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a fixed jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 10-8 shows a variation pattern in this feature section 109SG. In this feature section 109SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Note that although this feature section 109SG provides only one type of normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and may include a plurality of normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. It may be provided.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern in this feature section 109SG includes a special winning fluctuation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern in this feature section 109SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, as will be described later, the types of these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as non-reach types, normal reach types, super reach types, etc. After that, instead of determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from among the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and from these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern. The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this feature section 109SG. In this feature section 109SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α2 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern) and PB1-5 (Super Reach β2 jackpot fluctuation pattern).

In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern) and PB1. -2 (Super Reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (Super Reach α2 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-4 (Super Reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-5 (Super Reach β2 jackpot fluctuation pattern) Determine from.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1 is the same, while PB1-2, PB1 -3, the numbers of judgment values assigned to PB1-4 and PB1-5 are different. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 2 pieces are judged for PB1-1, 45 pieces are judged for PB1-2, 150 pieces are judged for PB1-3, 300 pieces are judged for PB1-4, and 500 pieces are judged for PB1-5. A value is assigned to each. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B, there are 2 judgment values for PB1-1, 30 judgment values for PB1-2, 135 judgment values for PB1-3, 315 judgment values for PB1-4, and 515 judgment values for PB1-5. assigned to each. In other words, in this feature section 109SG, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, the variation pattern is the super reach β1, β2 variation pattern at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probability variable jackpot. or PB1-5, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special win fluctuation pattern determination table, and use the special win fluctuation pattern determination table to determine the fluctuation pattern as PC1-1 (special win fluctuation pattern). do. In other words, in this feature section 109SG, the variable display is performed using the same variation pattern when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C and when the variable display result is a small win. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable jackpot C or a small hit.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss and select the corresponding Using variation pattern determination table A for misses, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α1 variation variation pattern), and PA2 It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α2 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β1 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern determination table B for the loss, and Using fluctuation pattern determination table B, change the fluctuation patterns to PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α1 deviation), and PA2 It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α2 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β1 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern determination table C for the loss, and Using fluctuation pattern determination table C, change the fluctuation patterns to PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α1 deviation), and PA2 It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α2 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β1 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. (Non-reach deviation pattern for time saving), PA2-1 (Normal reach deviation pattern), PA2-2 (Super reach α1 deviation pattern), PA2-3 (Super reach α2 deviation pattern), and PA2 -4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β1 is off) and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out).

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature section 109SG is "off", the special figure is The rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1). This makes it possible to prevent the game from being delayed and shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 to 10-35, the variable display of super reach α1 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-2 and PB1-2) in this feature section 109SG has a special figure variable display time of 40 seconds, and is a variable display that executes a battle performance between an ally character A and an enemy character A as a super reach performance. The variable display of Super Reach α2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-3 and PB1-3) has a special figure variable display time of 50 seconds, and as a reach effect of Super Reach, it is a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character B. It is a variable display that executes. The variable display of Super Reach β1 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and as a reach effect of Super Reach, it is a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A. It is a variable display that executes. The variable display of Super Reach β2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-5 and PB1-5) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and as a reach effect of Super Reach, it is a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A. It is a variable display that executes.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, as for the jackpot expectation of each variable display in this feature section 109SG, the jackpot expectation of super reach β2 is set to be the highest, and henceforth, super reach β1, super reach α2 , the jackpot expectation is set higher in the order of super reach α1, normal reach, and non-reach (jackpot expectation in each variable display in this feature section 109SG: super reach β2 > super reach β1 > super reach α2 > super reach α1 >Normal Reach > Non-Reach).

In other words, if we pay attention to the variable display of Super Reach, this feature section 109SG can determine whether the ally character displayed as a battle effect (reach effect of Super Reach) is ally character A or ally character B. The expectation level of the jackpot differs depending on the combination of whether the enemy character displayed as the reach effect is enemy character A or enemy character B.

The RAM 102 in the feature section 109SG includes a game control data holding area 109SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The data holding area 109SG150 for game control shown in FIG. , a game control timer setting section 109SG153, a game control counter setting section 109SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 109SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. , and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 109SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B indicates that although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, it has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passage (approach) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 109SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot based on the result).

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal figure reservation storage unit 109SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 109SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for the purpose is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 109SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 109SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 109SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 109SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting section 109SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section 109SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 109SG190 as shown in FIG. 10-11(A), for example, as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. It is being The production control data holding area 109SG190 shown in FIG. 10-11(A) includes a production control flag setting section 109SG191, a production control timer setting section 109SG192, a production control counter setting section 109SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 109SG194. We are prepared.

The effect control flag setting section 109SG191 includes a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting unit 109SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 109SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section 109SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 109SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 109SG193 stores data indicating count values of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 109SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting unit 109SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 109SG, data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-11(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 109SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 109SG194A are used for these starting opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category designation commands, A storage area (entry) is secured for storing the number of pending storage notification commands in association with each other and storing them separately in a first special symbol pending storage and a second special pattern pending storage.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are determined later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" are It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when the process ends.

Furthermore, in the starting winning reception command buffer 109SG194A of the feature section 109SG, a pending display flag is set to a flag value according to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that data can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the figure pending storage.

In addition, in the case where execution of the pre-read notice performance is not determined in the pre-read notice setting process described later, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display is stored in the pending display flag. As a result, the reserved memory display in the normal display mode (for example, a white circle) is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5, and When it is decided to execute the reading preview effect, "1" (square By setting (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)), a special mode of pending memory display different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D and the second pending memory display area 109SG005U. The variable display corresponding to the pending memory display foretells that there is a high possibility of a jackpot or a super reach.

The performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A when a starting prize is entered into the first starting prize opening. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the starting winning reception command buffer 109SG194A. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , symbol designation command, fluctuation category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. 10-11(B) is sent to the entry (buffer The entry stored in the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") is deleted. -1") and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in Figure 10-11(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols in the first special symbol retention memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands that are shifted and stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start-up winning determination process of the feature section 109SG executed in step S101 in FIG. 5 will be described based on FIGS. 10-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the state is the same (step 109SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the on state (step 109SGS101a; Y), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 109SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending memory number by reading the first pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending memory counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, for example. When the first special symbol pending storage number is not the upper limit value in step 109SGS102 (step 109SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 109SG155 is set to "1" ( Step 109SGS103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step 109SGS101a (step 109SGS101; N), or when the number of stored first special symbols has reached the upper limit value in step 109SGS102 (step 109SGS102; Y), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the on state ( Step 109SGS101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 109SGS101b; Y), the number of second special figure pending memories, which is the number of pending memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 109SGS105). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 109SG154, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in step 109SGS105 (step 109SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 109SG155 is set to "2" ( Step 109SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of step 109SGS103 and step 109SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 109SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is satisfied. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated by adding 1 (step 109SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step 109SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. Numerical data indicating a random number MR2 for use and a random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern are extracted (step 109SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage unit according to the starting opening buffer value (step 109SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage section 109SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step 109SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step 109SGS110, transmission settings of a starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value are performed (step 109SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the performance control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

Following the process of step 109SGS111, winning random value determination process is executed (step 109SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending memory number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. Settings are made for this purpose (step 109 SGS 113). The pending storage number notification command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 109SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS115), and then the process of step 109SGS104 is started. move on. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step 109SGS114; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS116), and then the starting winning prize is Finish the process. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 10-13(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 109SGS112 of FIG. 10-12 as the winning random value determination process. In this characteristic section 109SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 5, FIG. A determination is made as to whether or not to treat the result) as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot gaming state. In addition, in the variation pattern setting process (step S23 in FIG. 5, FIG. 10-12) to be described later, a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value judgment process of step 109 SGS 112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol is determined to be stopped and displayed as a special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach is determined. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is decided whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a "jackpot" or which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on this determination result, the production control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-read preview effect is executed.

In the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 10-13(A), the CPU 103 first checks the status of the time saving flag and probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting section 109SG152, etc. The current gaming state in machine 1 is specified (step 109SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability state is in the variable probability state when the variable probability flag is in the on state, and specifies that the state is in the reduced time state when the variable variable probability flag is in the off state and the time saving flag is in the on state, and when both the variable variable flag and the time saving flag are in the state When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 109SGS121, special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 10-6 is selected and set (step 109SGS122). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 109SGS109 of FIG. 10-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 109SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot" in the special figure display result judgment table 1 selected by the process of step 109SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 uses the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to determine the presence or absence of a judgment value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 109SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there is no jackpot in the variable display (step 109SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-6 2 is selected and set (step 109SGS124). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 109SGS109 of FIG. 10-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 109SGS125).

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a small hit in the variable display (step 109SGS125; Y), the variable display result will be a "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the 6th symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command according to the result (step 109SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 109SGS127), and proceed to step 109SGS138. .

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, if the variable display result is a "miss" in the variable display, a symbol will be displayed according to the variable display result being a "miss". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command, is executed (step 109SGS128), and it is determined whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (step 109SGS128). 109SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 109SGS129; N), select and set the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure, and if the time saving flag is on (step 109SGS129; Y), determine the fluctuation pattern for failure. Table D is selected and set (step 109SGS131). The error variation pattern determination table A is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. Further, the losing variation pattern determination table D is a losing variation pattern determining table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is being executed.

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, in addition to these fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss and fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss, there is also a fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss, which is used when the number of pending memories is three. , an error variation pattern determination table C is prepared in advance to be used when the number of pending memories is 4, but as shown in FIG. 10-9, among these error variation pattern determination tables A to C. , In the variation pattern judgment table A for a loss, 600 judgment values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern judgment can take. In the fluctuation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern among the possible ranges of the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, and the fluctuation pattern determination table for outliers is assigned. In C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern out of the possible range of the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for losing, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach fluctuation pattern out of the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take. .

Therefore, by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure in step 109SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach will always be non-reach or super reach even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Since this is a fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern determination table A for losing is used to determine when a starting prize is won.

In addition, if it is determined in step 109SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a jackpot during variable display (step 109SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 10-13 (A), , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 109SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , selects table data for jackpot type determination from table data configuring the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be determined.

In addition, the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot B, and the third symbol specification command if it is a probability variable jackpot C. executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the 5th symbol designation command (step 109SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot. (Step 109SGS134a). If the determined jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (step 109SGS134a; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 109SGS135), and step Proceed to 109SGS138.

Further, when the determined jackpot type is a variable probability jackpot (step 109SGS134a; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set (step 109SGS136), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS138.

After executing any of the processes in step 109SGS127, step 109SGS130, step 109SGS131, step 109SGS135, and step 109SGS136, each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and a numerical value indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are Using the data, a fluctuation category is determined according to the range of determination values including the random value MR3 (step 109SGS138). In this feature section 109SG, as shown in FIG. 10-13(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is "non-reach" regardless of the total number of retained memories. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "Super Reach", a variable category of "Other" that is a variable display mode other than "Non-reach" and "Super Reach" (for example, normal reach), It is sufficient if it can be determined based on the random value MR3 whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined.

Thereafter, a setting is made to transmit a fluctuation category designation command according to the determination result of the process of step 109SGS138 to the production control board 12 (step 109SGS132), and then the winning random number value determination process is ended.

Next, the operation of the production control board 12 will be explained. FIG. 10-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 in FIG. 6 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 10-14, the production control CPU 120 first confirms the storage contents of the production control command reception buffer and receives the reception from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. It is determined whether there is a command (step 109SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 109SGS221; N), the command analysis process ends.

If there is a received command in step 109SGS221 (step 109SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether the received command is the first starting opening prize designation command. (Step 109SGS222).

If the received command is not the first starting slot winning designation command at step 109SGS222 (step 109SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second starting slot winning designation command (step 109SGS224).

If the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command at step 109SGS224 (step 109SGS224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command (step 109SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command at step 109SGS226 (step 109SGS226; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step 109SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command in step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step 109SGS228).

If the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command at step 109SGS228 (step 109SGS228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (step 109SGS230).

If the received command in step 109SGS222 is a first starting opening winning designation command (step 109SGS222; Y), or if the receiving command in step 109SGS224 is a second starting opening winning designation command (step 109SGS224; Y), in step 109SGS226 If the received command is a symbol designation command (step 109SGS226; Y), if the received command is a variable category command in step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; Y), then in step 109SGS228, the received command is the first pending storage number notification command. (109SGS228; Y), and in step 109SGS230, if the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (step 109SGS230; Y), the received command is transferred to the free space in the starting prize receiving command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. 10-11. It is stored at the beginning of the area (step 109SGS233), and the process returns to step 109SGS221.

In addition, if a pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) is received together with a variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command), , the pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A. That is, it is only necessary to sequentially store the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of a starting prize winning from the beginning of the empty area in the starting winning receiving command buffer 109SG194A.

If the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command in step 109SGS230 (step 109SGS230; N), settings are made in accordance with other received commands (step 109SGS234), and the process returns to step 109SGS221.

In addition, in the command analysis process of this feature unit 109SG, if the received command is any of the starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, fluctuation category command, and pending storage number notification command, the received command is used at the starting winning time. Although an example is given in which storage is performed sequentially from the beginning of the free area of the reception command buffer 109SG194A, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the reception command is the 1st starting slot winning designation command, the command is used to store the number of pending storage notification commands. If a timer is set to wait for the reception of the number of pending memories, and if no pending memory number notification command is received before the timer times out, the pending memory of the entry that has not received the number of pending memory notification commands will be processed as described below. It may be set to be excluded from the reading preview performance.

FIG. 10-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 5 as the prefetch notice setting process. In the prefetch notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-15, the production control CPU 120 first checks the starting winning reception command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS241), and if there is a pending memory (entry) for which the pending display flag is not set, It is determined whether there is one (step 109SGS242a). If there is no pending memory for which the pending display flag is not set (Step 109SGS242a; N), the prefetch notice setting process is terminated, and if there is any pending memory for which the pending display flag is not set (Step 109SGS242a; Y), Furthermore, it is determined whether or not a super reach effect is being executed (step 109SGS242b).

In addition, whether or not the super reach reach effect is being executed depends on whether the value of the effect control process flag is 2 (whether the variable display is being executed or not) and the value of the effect control process flag. If is 2, it may be determined whether or not the super reach effect is being executed by referring to the contents of the process data of the variable display being executed.

If the super reach reach effect is being executed (step 109SGS242b; Y), the process advances to step 109SGS250, and if the super reach reach effect is not being executed (step 109SGS242bb; N), the entry (the pending display flag is It is determined whether the symbol designation command stored in the unset entry) is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a). If the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a; Y), the process advances to step 109SGS250, and the symbol designation command stored in the entry indicates a loss or a jackpot. If it is a symbol designation command (Step 109SGS243a; N), it is determined whether the symbol designation command stored in the entry is the first symbol designation command (a symbol designation command indicating a loss) (Step 109SGS243b) .

If the symbol designation command stored in the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot (step 109SGS243b; N), The jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (step 109SGS244).

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-read notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193, and the jackpot type specified in step 109SGS244, the pre-read at the time of the jackpot (not shown) is performed. By referring to the preview effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read preview effect and the display pattern when executing the pre-read preview effect (step 109SGS245).

In step 109SGS245, for example, the presence or absence of execution of a pre-read preview effect and the display pattern (pre-announcement type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 10-16. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-16, the determination ratio of the presence or absence of a pre-read preview performance and the display pattern (notice type) is varied depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of step 109SGS244.

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (notice types) for the pre-read preview performance: display pattern α and display pattern β. Among these, when the display pattern of the advance notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D or the second pending memory display area 109SG005U. When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-read preview effect is determined to be display pattern β, the pending memory display will be a white star (☆) in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D or the second pending memory display. Displayed in area 109SG005U.

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-16, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot", the ratio of display pattern β being determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the ratio of display pattern α being determined. It is also set high. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", the rate at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is set lower than the rate at which the display pattern α is determined.

With these settings, if the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type will be lower than the case where the display pattern α is displayed. The probability of a probability-variable jackpot is increased, and the player's expectations for a probability-variable jackpot can be increased.

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the display pattern α or the white star in which the pending memory display is displayed in a white square (◇) is always decided to execute the pre-read preview effect. Although one of the display patterns β in which the shape (☆) is displayed is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variable display result is a jackpot, the variable Similarly to the case where the display result is "miss", a case may be provided in which it is determined not to perform the pre-read preview effect.

In addition, in step 109SGS243b, if the symbol designation command of the entry whose display undetermined flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a miss (step 109SGS243b; Y), display undetermined The fluctuation category indicated by the fluctuation category designation command of the entry whose flag is on is identified (step 109SGS247). Specifically, if the fluctuation category designation command for the entry is C600H, it is specified that it is a category with a "non-reach" fluctuation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is determined that it is a category of a "super reach" fluctuation pattern. If it is C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation patterns including normal reach.

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-read preview performance extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting unit 109SG193, and the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in step 109SGS247, By referring to the missed advance notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) when executing the advance notice effect (step 109SGS248).

In step 109SGS248, for example, the execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 10-16. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-16, the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) and the execution/non-execution of the advance notice effect are varied depending on the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in the process of step 109SGS247. There is.

Specifically, two types of display patterns (notice types) are provided: display pattern α and display pattern β. Among these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is a white rectangle (◇) in a specific manner in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D or the second pending memory display area. 109SG005U, and when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be display pattern β, the pending memory display is a specific form of white star (☆) in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D or the second pending memory display area. It is displayed in the memory display area 109SG005U. Incidentally, when it is determined that the prefetch preview performance is not executed, the pending memory display is displayed in a round shape (◯), which is the normal mode, in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D or the second pending memory display area 109SG005U.

As shown in Figure 10-16, if the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the variation pattern is "other", the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the variation pattern is "non-conformity". The rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed (the rate determined to be other than ``no preview effect'') is set higher than in the case of ``Reach''. Also, if the variable display result is "Off" and the variation pattern category is "Super Reach", than when the variable display result is "Off" and the variation pattern category is "Other", The rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed (the rate determined to be other than "no preview effect") is set high.

When it is decided to execute a pre-read preview effect when the variable display result is "miss", if the variable category is "other", it is more important than if the variable pattern category is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern α is determined is also set high. Furthermore, when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "other". Furthermore, when the variable display result is "miss" and it is decided to execute the advance notice effect, if the category of the variable pattern is "other", the category of the variable pattern is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "Super Reach", and the display pattern The rate at which β is determined is set high.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss", the percentage of pre-read preview performances determined to be non-executable regardless of whether the variable pattern category is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach". is set to be the highest, and the rate at which the pre-read preview performance is decided to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to be the lowest.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the pre-read preview effect is not determined to be non-executable (no preview effect), and the pre-read preview effect is determined to be executed, and the display pattern α Alternatively, the rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined in any variable pattern category when the variable display result is “miss”.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "miss (non-reach)," "miss (super reach)," or "miss (other)," when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, the display pattern α The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "jackpot (probable jackpot)", when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, the proportion at which the display pattern β is determined is the proportion at which the display pattern α is determined. is set higher than.

Due to such settings, if display pattern α or display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the preview preview effect, if display pattern α or display pattern β is not executed (displayed) There is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" than the above, and especially if the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "probable variable jackpot". This increases the player's expectations.

After executing step 109SGS248, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether execution of the pre-read preview performance was determined in step 109SGS247, that is, whether the display pattern (notice type) was determined to be either display pattern α or display pattern β. It is determined whether or not (step 109SGS249).

After executing step 109SGS245 or when it is decided to execute a pre-read preview effect (step 109SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (notice type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 109SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is the display pattern α in which the pending storage display is indicated by "◇", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is the display pattern β in which the pending storage display is indicated by "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

In addition, in step 109SGS249, if it is not decided to execute the advance notice effect (step 109SGS249; N), after setting the pending display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "○" (step 109SGS250) and proceeds to step 109SGS252.

In addition, as described above, even when the reach effect of Super Reach is being executed (Step 109SGS242b; Y) or when the symbol designation command of the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (Step 109SGS243a), the entry After setting the hold display flag to "0" indicating a white "○" (step 109SGS250), the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the pending display based on the stored contents of the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to "0", "1", or "2" set in the pending display flag. Ru. In addition, even when the variable display is executed and the stored contents of the starting prize winning reception command buffer 109SG194A are shifted, the contents of the starting prize winning receiving command buffer 109SG194A are changed according to the stored contents of the starting prize winning receiving command buffer 109SG194A in FIG. 10-17. As shown, the hold display of the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the second hold storage display area 109SG005U provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-17, if the number of first special symbol pending memories is one, one pending memory display is displayed. As for the display mode of this pending memory display, when the flag value of the pending display flag corresponding to the pending memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○" as shown in Figure 10-17. , if the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it will be displayed in the display mode of "◇", and if the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", it will be displayed in the display mode of "☆" will be displayed. In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is two, two pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D. In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is three, three pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D. In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is four, four pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D.

Further, if the second special figure pending storage number is one, one pending storage display is displayed. As in the case of the first special figure, if the flag value of the pending display flag corresponding to the pending memory is "0", the display mode of this pending memory display is "○". If the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it will be displayed in the display format of "◇", and if the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", it will be displayed as "☆". It is displayed in the following manner. In addition, if the second special figure pending memory number is two, for example, as shown in Figure 10-17, two pending memory displays will be displayed, and each pending memory display will be the pending display of the corresponding pending memory. As a mode according to the flag value set in the flag, for example, the pending memory display of 1 is displayed as "○", and the pending memory display of 1 is displayed as "☆" in the second pending memory display area 109SG005U. Is displayed. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending memories is three, three pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the second pending storage display area 109SG005U. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending memories is four, four pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the second pending storage display area 109SG005U.

Each time the variable display is executed, the reserved memory is reduced (consumed), and as shown in FIG. (towards the center).

In other words, if the pending memory is consumed in the variable display start setting process to be described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, and the pending memory of the starting prize receiving command buffer 109SG194A is shifted, then when starting winning after the shift Based on the pending memory of the reception command buffer 109SG194A, the pending memory displays in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D and the second pending memory display area 109SG005U are also shifted and displayed, and a new pending memory is created due to the start winning. In this case, the display pattern of the pending memory is determined and set in the pending display flag, and the first pending memory display area 109SG005D and the second pending memory display area 109SG005D and the second pending memory are It will now be displayed in the memory display area 109SG005U.

Note that although this characteristic section 109SG exemplifies a form in which the process of step 109SGS252 is executed in the prefetch notice setting process, the present invention is not limited to this, and these first reservation storage display areas 109SG005D The process for updating the hold display in the second hold storage display area 109SG005U may be executed separately as a process different from the prefetch preview setting process (for example, hold display update process).

Furthermore, in step 109SGS242, this feature section 109SG determines whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory for the starting prize on the condition that there is a new storage of the command at the starting winning. Due to the simultaneous occurrence of a starting prize in the first starting winning hole and a starting winning in the second starting winning hole, a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning in both the first special drawing and the second special drawing is performed in step 109SGS242. If it is determined that there is, that is, if an entry whose display undetermined flag is on exists in both the first special figure reservation memory and the second special figure reservation memory, both entries are read in advance and announced. This is used to determine whether or not to perform the performance. Both the reserved memory in which the command at the time of starting prize winning in the first special drawing was newly stored and the reserved memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special drawing were newly stored are used to determine the execution and non-execution of the advance notice performance. If it is determined, if there is no entry for the hold display flag of ``1'' or ``2'' indicating the execution of the pre-read preview effect, the hold display of the hold memory of the 1st special figure and the hold of the 2nd special figure will be displayed. Prefetch preview effects may be executed simultaneously on both displays.

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, when a starting prize in the first starting winning hole and a starting winning in the second starting winning hole occur at the same time as described above, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special drawing is Both the newly stored pending memory and the newly stored pending memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special drawing are newly stored are subject to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance, but the present invention is not limited to this. In such a case, the execution or non-execution of the pre-read notice effect in the reserved memory for the first special figure, and the execution or non-execution of the pre-read notice effect in the reserved memory for the second special figure. It is also possible to decide to execute only one of them.

Specifically, when the gaming state is a normal state in which high opening control is not performed, the decision to execute or non-execute the pre-read preview performance in the suspended memory in the first special figure is suspended in the second special figure. This is done with priority over the decision on whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special figure, the execution of the pre-read preview effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the first special figure If it is decided not to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the figure, it is only necessary to decide whether to execute or not to perform the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, if the gaming state is a time saving state where high opening control is performed (high probability high base state/low probability high base state), execution or non-execution of the pre-read notice performance in the reserved memory in the second special symbol This determination is given priority over the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special figure, the execution of the pre-read preview effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the second special figure When it is decided not to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the figure, it is only necessary to decide whether to execute or not to perform the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special figure.

FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS271; Y), the buffer number of the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A is set to ``1-0'' to ``1-4''. Various command data and various flags stored in association with are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 109SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 109SGS271 (step 109SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 109SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273; Y ), the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A are stored in one buffer number. It is shifted upward by minutes (step 109SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 109SGS272 or step 109SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 109SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 109SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as "7" as the stop symbols. ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot B, multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", Decorative pattern combinations such as "333", "555", "999", etc.) are selected. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the 4th variable display result designation command that corresponds to probability variable jackpot C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from among them. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 6th variable display result designation command that corresponds to a small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the probability variable jackpot C. Decide from among them. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, a decorative pattern in which three symbols are irregular as a stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance. (missing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Then, in step 109SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 109SGS282).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 109SGS283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the production control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 109SGS284). Also, a first time is set in the variable display control timer (step 109SGS285). The first time is, for example, 33 ms, and each time the first time elapses, the performance control CPU 120 stores the image data that is being displayed in a variable manner, including the image data that indicates the display state of the decorative pattern on the left center right, into the VRAM. The write/display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal. As a result, variable display of decorative patterns and display of moving images of other effects are realized (see FIG. 10-20).

In addition, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 109SGS287). When the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (Step 109SGS287; Y), a second time is set in the movable body control timer (Step 109SGS288). The second time is, for example, 1 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 controls the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 every time the first time elapses. Take control. Thereby, movement control of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is realized (see FIG. 10-20).

After executing step 109SGS288, or if the variation pattern of the variable display is not a super reach variation pattern (step 109SGS287; N), the production control CPU 120 changes the value of the production control process flag to the production process during variable display (step S172), and the variable display start setting process ends (step 109SGS286).

FIG. 10-19 is a flowchart showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process process. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from each value of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer (step 109SGS301, step 109SGS302, step 109SGS303). Further, if the variable display is a super reach variable display (step 109SGS303b; Y), the value of the movable body control timer is decremented by 1 (step 109SGS303c).

In addition, after executing step 109SGS303c, or when the super reach is not variable display (step 109SGS303b; N), the process advances to step 109SGS306.

In step 109SGS306, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 109SGS307). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table to the process timer (step 109 SGS308). Further, the control state for the production device (production component) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. set next (step 109SGS309a). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the production device (for production (step 109SGS309b).

After executing the process of step 109SGS309a or step 109SGS309b, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variable display is a super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f).

If the variable display is a super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f; Y), it is further determined whether the movable body control timer has timed out (109SGS309g). If the movable body control timer has timed out (step 109SGS309g; Y), the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 are driven according to the contents of the process data. (Step 109SGS309h). Then, the movable body control timer is reset (the second time is set in the movable body control timer again), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS310 (step 109SGS309i).

Note that if the variable display is not a super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f; N) and if the movable body control timer has not timed out (step 109SGS309g; N), the processes of step 109SGS309h and step 109SGS309i are executed. The process then proceeds to step 109SGS310.

Next, it is checked whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 109SGS310). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 109SGS310; Y), the production control CPU 120 displays the next display screen (33 ms from the time of the previous image update) during the variable display including the left-center right decorative pattern. The image data of the screen to be displayed after the elapsed time is created and written to a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 109SGS311). In this way, in the image display device 5, variable display control of decorative patterns and display control of other images (video display control) are realized. The display control unit 123 sends to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this way, on the image display device 5, the background image, character image, and decorative pattern in the variation of the decorative pattern are displayed. Also, the variable display control timer is reset to the first time (step 109SGS312).

Further, if the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 109SGS310; N), after executing step 109SGS312, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 109SGS313). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 109SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is on (step 109SGS314; Y), the value of the production control process flag is set to the special symbol. It is updated to a value according to the waiting process (step S173) (step 109SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, once a pattern confirmation designation command is received, the control will stop the fluctuation, so for example, a fluctuation pattern designation command that indicates a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards, etc. Even in such a case, when the regular variable display time has elapsed (when the variable display of the special symbol ends), the variable display of the decorative symbol can be ended.

Incidentally, process data during variable display of the decorative pattern is set in the process table used for variable display control of the decorative pattern. In other words, the sum of the process timer setting values of process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the process timer for the last process data n times out in the process of step 109SGS306, there is no process data to be switched (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.), and the variable display control of decorative patterns based on the process table is performed. ends.

Next, the operation mode of each production device during the ready-to-reach production of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 in the feature section 109SG will be explained. The presentation mode of the variable display will be explained based on FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24.

First, as shown in Figures 10-21 and 10-22, regarding the variable display of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, when the reach effect of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2 starts, the first enlarged display period , the character images displayed on the image display device 5 during the second enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period (for the reach effect of super reach α1, the ally character A and the enemy character A, and for the reach effect of super reach α2) If so, an enlarged display of friendly character A and enemy character B) is executed.

Specifically, in the first enlarged display period, the character image is enlarged at a constant speed from the normal display magnification (1x) to the display magnification m1, and in the second enlarged display period, the character image is displayed from the display magnification m1. The character image is enlarged at a constant speed from the display magnification m2 to the display magnification m3 in the third enlarged display period. Then, after the third enlarged display period ends, the display magnification of the character image is maintained at m3 for a predetermined period, and the display magnification of the character image is returned to the normal display magnification at the timing when the predetermined period has elapsed. .

Note that in this feature section 109SG, the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period are all periods of the same length. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the difference between each display magnification is that the difference between the normal display magnification and the display magnification m1 is the largest, and the difference between the display magnification m2 and the display magnification m3 is the largest. is the smallest. That is, in this feature section 109SG, regarding the enlargement speed of the character image, the enlargement speed during the first enlarged display period is set to be the fastest, and the enlargement speed during the third enlarged display period is set to be the slowest (enlargement speed of character image: (first enlarged display period>second enlarged display period>third enlarged display period). Note that in the feature section 109SG, "the enlargement speed is fast" means that the enlargement rate of the image per unit time is large.

Thereafter, in this feature section 109SG, the period that combines the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (the period in which the movable body motion suggestion effect is executed) is set as period T2, and the third enlarged display period and the character image The period including the predetermined period during which the display magnification is maintained at m3 may be referred to as period T3.

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-21, during the reach effect of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, if the variable display result is a jackpot, from the end timing of period T3 to the end timing of the variable display. As a performance to notify that the variable display result is a jackpot, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retreat position to the performance position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401. After moving the movable body unit 109SG400 to the close position (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved. A movable body motion effect A is executed to move the movable body unit 109SG400 to the retreat position (change the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-22, during the reach effect of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, if the variable display result is a failure, from the end timing of period T3 to the end timing of the variable display, By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, a failure notification effect is executed to notify that the variable display result is a failure.

Hereinafter, in this feature section 109SG, the execution period of the movable body effect A and the failure notification effect may be referred to as a period T4. Regarding these periods T2 to T4, period T3 is the shortest period, and period T4 is the longest period (length of period T2 to period T4: period T4>period T2>period T3).

Also, during the reach effects of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, effect images are also displayed on the image display device 5 as movable body motion suggestion performance A and movable body motion performance A (only when the variable display result is a jackpot). .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, in the image display device 5, the first movable body is A movable body motion suggestion production A in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward 109SG401 at a speed V1 is executed.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a jackpot, as part of the above-mentioned movable body movement effect A, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed of V2 over a period T4. It moves (diffuses) toward the edge of the display device 5. Note that the absolute value of the speed V2 is greater than the absolute value of the speed V1. In other words, the movable body motion representation A in the main feature section 109SG is also a representation in which the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S moves faster than the movable body motion suggestion representation A.

Furthermore, during the reach effects of super reach α1 and super reach α2, the movable body LED 109SG495 also emits light. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the movable LED 109SG495 is activated during the period T2 (the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period) and during the period T3 (more accurately, during the period T3). The movable body LED 109SG495 is caused to emit light at the brightness C1 from the start timing of the first enlarged display period to the end timing of the third enlarged display period). Further, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body LED 109SG495 is caused to emit light at a brightness C2 that is higher than the brightness C1 over a period T4.

Also, during the reach performance of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, four types of performance sounds can be output from speakers 8L and 8R: BGM of music, SE (sound effects), action suggestion sound, and jackpot notification sound. The type of sound that is output varies depending on the time during the reach performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the BGM is a performance sound that is output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the start of the variable display, and is output from the speakers 8L and 8R only during period T3. output is stopped. That is, the output of BGM in the ready-to-win performance is executed over the period T4 from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance to the end timing of the period T2.

Also, like BGM, SE (sound effect) is a sound effect that is output from speakers 8L and 8R from the start of variable display, but unlike BGM, there is no period during which the output from speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. . In other words, the output of SE in the ready-to-win performance is executed over the entire ready-to-win performance.

The motion suggestion sound is a sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R as part of the movable body motion suggestion production A. In other words, the motion suggestion sound is output only during period T2, which is the execution period of movable body motion suggestion performance A, and is not output during other periods. The jackpot notification sound is a sound effect outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R as part of the movable body movement effect A. That is, the jackpot notification sound is output only during the period T4, which is the execution period of the movable body motion performance A when the variable display result becomes a jackpot, and is not output during other periods.

As shown in Figures 10-23 and 10-24, regarding the variable display of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, when the reach effect of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2 starts, the first enlarged display period, Character images displayed on the image display device 5 in the second enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period (ally character B and enemy character A in the reach effect of super reach β1, and character images displayed in the reach effect of super reach β2) Enlarged display of friendly character B and enemy character B) is executed.

From now on, the enlarged display of the character image in the variable display of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, the light emitting mode of the movable body LED109SG495, the output of BGM, SE, action suggestion sound, and jackpot notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R are shown in Figure 10- Since this is the same mode as the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach α2 shown in FIGS. 21 and 10-22, the explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 10-23, during the reach effect of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the variable display will be displayed from the end timing of period T3 to the end timing of the variable display. As a performance to notify that the display result is a jackpot, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retreat position to the performance position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and third movable body 109SG402R are moved to positions close to the first movable body 109SG401. After moving (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to their respective retracted positions. A movable body motion effect B is executed to move (change the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-24, during the reach effect of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, if the variable display result is a failure, from the end timing of period T3 to the end timing of the variable display, By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, a failure notification effect is executed to notify that the variable display result is a failure. The movable body performance B is a performance that is executed over a period T4, like the above-mentioned movable body performance A and the failure notification performance.

Also, during the reach effects of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, as shown in FIGS. 10-23 and 10-24, over the aforementioned period T2 (first enlarged display period and second enlarged display period), A movable body motion suggestion performance B is executed in which the first movable body 109SG401 is repeatedly moved (reciprocated) between the retreat position and the suggested position. Note that the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position in the movable body motion suggestion performance B is shorter than the aforementioned period T3 ( Length of period T1 to period T4: period T4>period T2>period T3>period T1).

As described above, in the variable display of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2, as shown in FIG. While the motion suggestion performance is executed, the movable body motion suggestion performance is not executed during the third enlarged display period. Further, among the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, the character image enlargement speed is the fastest in the first enlarged display period (the enlargement rate of the image per unit time is large), and the During the enlarged display period, the character image enlargement speed is set to be slowest (image enlargement rate per unit time is small).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-26(A), when comparing the movable body motion suggestion performance A and the movable body motion suggestion performance B, it is found that the movable body motion suggestion performance A produces a star-shaped effect image on the image display device 5. 109SG005S acts repeatedly on the first movable body 109SG401 (multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at speed V1), and the first movable body 109SG401 itself The difference is that the movable body motion suggestion performance B does not move, whereas the first movable body 109SG401 repeatedly moves between the retreat position and the suggested position. On the other hand, movable body motion suggestion performance A and movable body motion suggestion performance B both have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light at brightness C1 during the execution period of the performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-26(B), when comparing movable body motion performance A and movable body motion performance B, movable body motion performance A moves the first movable body 109SG401 from the retreat position to the performance position, and , move the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R to positions close to the first movable body that has been moved to the production position (change the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), and This is an effect in which a star-shaped effect image 109SG005S spreads from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed of V2. Movable body movement performance B moves the first movable body 109SG401 from the retreat position to the performance position, and moves the second movable body 109SG402L and third movable body 109SG402R to positions close to the first movable body that has been moved to the performance position. This is an effect of moving the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state, and the display in which multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are spread from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed of V2 is not executed. This is different from movable body motion performance A. Furthermore, movable body motion performance A and movable body motion performance B both have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light at brightness C1 during the execution period of the performance.

Next, the display mode of the reach effect on the image display device 5 in the variable display of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-27 to 10-35.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-27(A) and 10-27(B), after a while after the variable display of Super Reach α1, Super Reach α2, Super Reach β1, or Super Reach β2 starts, , the decorative symbols displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R stop at a combination indicating reach. Then, when a predetermined period of time further passes in the reach state, if the variable display is the variable display of super reach α1, a battle performance between ally character A and enemy character A is started as a reach performance (Figure 10-27 (C ) and Figure 10-28 (A)), and if the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach α2, a battle performance between ally character A and enemy character B will start as a reach effect (see Figure 10-27 (D) and (See Figure 10-30 (A)), if the variable display is super reach β1, a battle performance between ally character B and enemy character A will start as a reach effect (see Figures 10-27 (E) and 10 -32 (A)), if the variable display is the variable display of super reach β2, a battle effect between ally character B and enemy character B will start as a reach effect (see Figure 10-27 (F) and Figure 10- 34(A)).

In addition, at the start of these super reach reach performances, the decorative symbols displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed at the upper left and right ends of the display area of the image display device 5. The ornamental symbols that have been displayed in the display area 5Cni of the "middle" ornamental symbols are temporarily rendered invisible.

As shown in Figures 10-28 (A) and 10-28 (B), when reaching the second half of the battle performance that is the reach performance of Super Reach α1, as shown in Figure 10-28 (C), allies Display of a moving image in which character A attacks enemy character A is started. In the video, as shown in FIGS. 10-28(C) to 10-28(F), during the aforementioned first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period, ally character A In a scene where a melee attack is to be applied to enemy character A, images of friendly character A and enemy character A are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-28(D) to 10-28(F)), the images of the friendly character A and the enemy character A are displayed first on the image display device 5. It is displayed with lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (Figures 10-28 (A) to 10-28 (C)), and the images of friendly character A and enemy character A, which have low contrast, are overlapped. , an image in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1 (movable body motion suggestion effect A) is displayed. At this time, the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period. It is now easier to recognize the movement towards the target.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 emits light at the brightness C1.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-28(E) to 10-28(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the friendly character A and the enemy character A are displayed at a display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. Display at. Note that during the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (H) and FIG. 10-29 (I), when the variable display result is a jackpot, as a movable body movement effect A, the ally character A and the enemy character are displayed in the center of the image display device 5. The explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the image of the character A, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edges of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. Effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Furthermore, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the production position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to positions close to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the production position. (The movable unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). In other words, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed moving toward the edge of the image display device 5 at the speed V2. Ru.

Thereafter, after the operation of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state. A video in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to their respective evacuation positions is completed, and the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character A on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. is displayed, and it is announced that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) as numerical values corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop at a combination indicating a jackpot), the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (J) and 10-29 (K), as a failure notification effect, the attack of the enemy character A is displayed on the image display device 5 as an ally. A display of an action in which the character A is hit and the ally character is defeated is executed, and it is reported that the jackpot game state is not controlled (that the game is a loss). At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. After moving from above the image display device 5 at a speed lower than that at the time of jackpot shown in 10-29 (I), it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 10-30 (A) and 10-30 (B), when reaching the latter half of the battle performance (reach performance) as a reach performance of Super Reach α2, as shown in Figure 10-30 (C) , the display of a moving image in which friendly character A attacks enemy character B begins. In the video, as shown in FIGS. 10-30(C) to 10-30(F), during the aforementioned first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period, ally character A In a scene where a melee attack is to be applied to enemy character B, images of friendly character A and enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-30(D) to 10-30(F)), the images of friendly character A and enemy character B are It is displayed with lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (Figures 10-30 (A) to 10-30 (C)), and the images of friendly character A and enemy character B, which have low contrast, are overlapped. , an image in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1 (movable body motion suggestion effect A) is displayed. At this time, the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period. It is now easier to recognize the movement towards the target.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 emits light at the brightness C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the friendly character A and the enemy character B are displayed at the display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. Note that during the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (G) to FIG. 10-31 (I), if the variable display result is a jackpot, as a movable body movement effect A, the ally character A and enemy character An explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the image of character B, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. Effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Furthermore, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the production position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to positions close to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the production position. (The movable unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). In other words, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed moving toward the edge of the image display device 5 at the speed V2. Ru.

Thereafter, after the operation of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state. A video in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to their respective evacuation positions is completed, and the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. is displayed, and it is announced that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) as numerical values corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop at a combination indicating a jackpot), the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, as shown in FIGS. 10-31 (J) and 10-31 (K), as a failure notification effect, the attack of the enemy character B is displayed on the image display device 5 as an ally. A display of an action in which the character A is hit and the ally character is defeated is executed, and it is reported that the jackpot game state is not controlled (that the game is a loss). At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. After moving from above the image display device 5 at a speed lower than that at the time of jackpot shown in 10-29 (I), it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 10-32 (A) and 10-32 (B), when reaching the latter half of the battle performance (reach performance) as the reach performance of Super Reach β1, as shown in Figure 10-32 (C) Then, a moving image of friendly character B attacking enemy character A is started to be displayed. In the video, as shown in FIGS. 10-32(C) to 10-32(F), during the aforementioned first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period, ally character B In a scene where a melee attack is to be applied to enemy character A, images of friendly character B and enemy character A are displayed in an enlarged manner.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggestion effect B (the movable body unit The change from the first state to the second state and the change from the second state to the first state of the 109SG 400 are repeatedly executed).

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-32(D) and 10-32(E), during the enlarged display period of the images of ally character B and enemy character A, the effect image 109SG005X is displayed on the image display device 5, The enlarged display of the images of ally character B and enemy character A is emphasized by the effect image 109SG005X.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 emits light at the brightness C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-32(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the friendly character B and the enemy character A are displayed at the display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. Note that during the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIG. 10-33 (G) to FIG. 10-33 (I), when the variable display result is a jackpot, as a movable body motion effect B, ally character B and enemy character An explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the character A image.

Furthermore, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the production position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to positions close to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the production position. (The movable unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

Thereafter, after the operation of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state. A video in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to their respective evacuation positions is completed, and the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character A on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. is displayed, and it is announced that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) as numerical values corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop at a combination indicating a jackpot), the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 (J) and 10-33 (K), as a failure notification effect, the attack of the enemy character A is displayed on the image display device 5 as an ally. A display of an action in which the character B is hit and the ally character is defeated is executed, and a notification is made that the jackpot game state is not controlled (that the game is a loss). At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. After moving from above the image display device 5 at a speed lower than that at the time of jackpot shown in 10-29 (I), it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 10-34 (A) and 10-34 (B), when reaching the latter half of the battle performance (reach performance) as the reach performance of Super Reach β2, as shown in Figure 10-34 (C) , the display of a moving image in which friendly character B attacks enemy character B begins. In the video, as shown in FIGS. 10-34(C) to 10-34(F), during the aforementioned first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period, ally character B In a scene where a melee attack is to be applied to enemy character B, images of friendly character B and enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggestion effect B (the movable body unit The change from the first state to the second state and the change from the second state to the first state of the 109SG 400 are repeatedly executed).

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-34(D) and 10-34(E), during the enlarged display period of the images of ally character B and enemy character A, the effect image 109SG005X is displayed on the image display device 5, The enlarged display of the images of ally character B and enemy character A is emphasized by the effect image 109SG005X.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 emits light at the brightness C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-34(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the friendly character B and the enemy character B are displayed at a display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. Note that during the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-35 (G) to 10-35 (I), if the variable display result is a jackpot, as a movable body motion effect B, the ally character B An explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the image of the enemy character B, and a plurality of stars are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. The type effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Furthermore, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the production position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to positions close to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the production position. (The movable unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

Thereafter, after the operation of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state. A video in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to their respective evacuation positions is completed, and the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. is displayed, and it is announced that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) as numerical values corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop at a combination indicating a jackpot), the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, as shown in FIGS. 10-35 (J) and 10-35 (K), as a failure notification effect, the attack of the enemy character B is displayed on the image display device 5 as an ally. A display of an action in which the character B is hit and the ally character is defeated is executed, and a notification is made that the jackpot game state is not controlled (that the game is a loss).
At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. After moving from above the image display device 5 at a speed lower than that at the time of jackpot shown in 10-29 (I), it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 109SG does not display the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 while the movable body motion suggestion effect B is being executed, as shown in 10-31 to 10-35. On the other hand, while the movable body movement effect B is being executed, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the image of the friendly character or enemy character during the reach effect is enlarged by displaying the explosion effect image 109SG005B. Since the performance of the movable body motion performance B by the display and the movable bodies (first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R) can be made more conspicuous, the game enjoyment can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the magnification speed of each character's image is different between the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, thereby improving the production effect during the enlarged display period. Since the operating speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is the same in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the control load on the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body movement performance can be reduced.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the second enlarged display period has a slower enlargement speed than the first enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period after the movable body motion suggestion effect ends. Since the enlargement speed is slower than the second enlarged display period, the enlarged display of the images of the friendly character and the enemy character continues even after the movable body motion suggestion performance ends, so that the game enjoyment can be improved. In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, although the mode in which the enlargement speed in the first enlarged display period is the fastest and the enlargement speed in the third enlarged display period is the slowest is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the enlargement speed in the third enlarged display period is the slowest. The expansion speed in the third expansion display period may be the fastest, the expansion speed in the first expansion display period may be the slowest, or the expansion speed in the second expansion display period may be the fastest.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-21 to 10-24, execution of the look-ahead preview effect is restricted during the reach effect including the enlarged display period. can be prevented from decreasing. In addition, although this feature section 109SG exemplifies a form in which the execution of the look-ahead preview performance is restricted throughout the execution period of the reach performance, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution of the look-ahead notice performance is The period during which execution is restricted may be only a part of the reach effect (for example, only the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period). In addition, in this feature section 109SG, as a form of restricting the execution of the pre-read preview effect, a mode in which the pre-read preview effect is not executed during the reach-to-reach effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and During the performance, the preview preview performance may be performed at a lower rate than during other periods.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, the player can visually confirm the reach effect while the movable body motion suggestion effect B is being executed, but as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-35, In addition, during the execution of the movable body action effect B, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby reducing the visibility of the reach effect. In other words, the visibility of the reach effect performance images (images of ally characters and enemy characters) changes depending on the operating status of the first movable body 109SG401, so the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 changes as a movable body motion suggestion effect. It is possible to easily understand whether the motion is a motion or a motion as a movable body motion effect, and the degree of attention of the first movable body 109SG401 and the reach effect effect image can be adjusted.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, while the movable body motion suggestion performance is being executed, BGM, SE, and motion suggestion sound are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while the movable body motion performance is being executed. During the game, BGM, SE, and jackpot notification sound are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, so they are output from the speakers 8L and 8R before and after the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body movement performance. To make it easier for a player to recognize that the performance sound is changing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the period T3 is longer than the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position. Yes, the period T3 is a shorter period than the period T2 in which the movable body motion suggestion performance is executed, so the motion of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion production is the same as the motion of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion suggestion production. It is possible to prevent the player from misperceiving that the moving body motion is the same, and also to reduce the interest in the game due to the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion performance being longer than the execution period of the movable body motion production in the suggested reach performance. It is also possible to prevent the decline.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, by turning off the movable body LED 109SG495 during the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start of the movable body movement performance or the failure notification performance, the movable body LED 109SG495 During the period in which the light is off, the player can easily recognize that the first movable body 109SG401 is not operating.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, in the movable body motion suggestion effect B, only the first movable body 109SG401 is operated, and as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-35, the movable body In motion production B, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are all operated, so it is difficult to determine whether the motion of the movable body is a motion suggesting a movable body motion or not. This makes it easier for the player to distinguish between motions and motions.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, in the first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 is made to emit light at the brightness C1, and the movable body movement is produced. During execution, the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light at a brightness C2 that is higher than the brightness C1, so the brightness of the movable body LED 109SG495 makes it easier for the player to recognize that the movable body movement performance is being executed. It is also possible to improve the game's interest during execution of the movable body movement performance.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, while the movable body motion suggestion effect A is being executed, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5, and other reach effects are displayed. The effect images (images of ally character A and enemy character A or enemy character B) are displayed with a lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period, that is, while the moving body motion suggestion effect A is being executed, the effect image of the reach effect is displayed. Since the visibility of the star-shaped effect images 109SG005S is reduced, the star-shaped effect images 109SG005S can stand out, and the movement of these star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V1 can draw the player's attention to the first movable body 109SG401. Therefore, the performance effect of the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 and 10-31, when the movable body movement effect A is executed, the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed at a speed V2 which is higher than the speed V1 on the image display device 5. Since the first movable body 109SG401 is displayed moving toward the edge of the image display device 5, it is possible to make the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S stand out in the movable body motion production A, and also to By moving the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V2, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the first movable body 109SG401, so that the production effect of the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 can be enhanced, which increases the interest of the game. can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-28(F) and 10-30(F), the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is not displayed on the image display device 5 before the movable body motion effect A or the deviation notification effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the performance to be executed from now on is a movable body movement performance or a failure notification performance.

Although the characteristic portion 109SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic portions, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

For example, in the feature section 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) are the same, that is, , exemplifies a form in which the start timing of the reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retreat position and the suggested position and the start timing of the enlarged display of the reach effect production image (images of the friendly character and enemy character) are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) may be different. In particular, when the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion performance is set to a timing earlier than the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period), the reciprocating motion of the first movable body 109SG401 as the movable body motion suggestion production is performed. can increase the attention of players.

Further, in the characteristic portion 109SG, the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 after the end of the enlarged display period and the display state of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period are almost the same (the display magnification is slightly different). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a modified example 109SG-2, after the enlarged display period ends, a specific effect is displayed on the image display device 5. The display mode of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period may be changed by displaying an image or an effect image. By doing so, after the enlarged display period ends, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the enlarged display period has ended.

In addition, the feature section 109SG has a form that allows the image display device 5 to display an explosion effect image 109SG005B according to the movements of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R during reach effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in Modification Example 109SG-3, the image display device 5 displays images according to the progress of a battle performance between an ally character and an enemy character, which is executed as a reach performance. It may also be possible to display an effect image.

In this way, when the image display device 5 can display both the explosion effect image 109SG005B according to the movement of the movable body and the effect image according to the progress of the battle production, The size of the explosion effect image 109SG005B and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle performance may be made different. By doing this, the image display device 5 can display an effect image of an appropriate size that corresponds to the difference between the movement of the movable body and the battle performance during the reach performance, thereby improving the interest in the game. .

Furthermore, if the image display device 5 is capable of displaying both an explosion effect image 109SG005B that corresponds to the movement of the movable body and an effect image that corresponds to the progress of the battle production, the explosion effect that corresponds to the movement of these movable bodies can be displayed. The image transparency may be made different between the image 109SG005B and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle performance. By doing this, the image display device 5 can display an effect image with an appropriate image transparency corresponding to the difference between the movement of the movable body and the battle performance during the reach performance, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. can.

Further, in the characteristic section 109SG, the friendly character and the enemy character are visually recognized on the image display device 5 during the period from the end of the movable body motion suggestion production and enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body motion production or failure notification production. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, as a modification 109SG-4, after the movable body motion suggestion performance and the enlarged display period have ended, the movable body motion performance or miss notification is performed. During the period up to the start timing of the performance, the contrast and brightness on the image display device 5 are set to a first low visibility state that is lower than before the end of the enlarged display period, thereby reducing the visibility of friendly characters and enemy characters. You may let them. Furthermore, when performing a movable body movement effect (when the variable display result is a jackpot), by changing the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5 from the first low visibility state to a second low visibility state, which is even lower, The visibility of friendly characters and enemy characters may be further reduced. By doing this, after the enlarged display period ends, the visibility of the friendly characters and enemy characters on the image display device 5 decreases, so that the player can easily recognize that the enlarged display period has ended. When performing the movable body effect, it is possible to increase attention to the operations of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R.

In addition, in the characteristic section 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 to 10-35, the same effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and during execution of the movable body movement effect. (the same ally character and enemy character), the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 109SG-5, it is possible to A different effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the action effect. In particular, the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect is determined from the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body movement suggestion effect. You can also increase the number. By doing this, it is possible to increase the number of variations of the effect images displayed on the image display device 5 while the movable body motion suggesting effect is being executed, and therefore it is possible to improve the game enjoyment when the movable body movement suggesting effect is being executed. .

In addition, in the characteristic section 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 to 10-35, the same effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and during execution of the movable body movement effect. (The same friendly character and enemy character) are shown as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 109SG-6, during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect, While the image display device 5 displays images corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance, while the movable body motion performance is being executed, the image display device 5 displays images corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance. As the image corresponding to the body motion effect, an image different from the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect may be displayed.

Furthermore, when the image display device 5 is capable of displaying images compatible with movable body motion suggestion effects and images compatible with movable body movement effects, the display period of images compatible with movable body motion suggestion effects and the display period of images compatible with movable body movement effects may be set. It may be different. By doing this, the images corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance and the images corresponding to the movable body motion performance It becomes possible to display the display at an appropriate period corresponding to whether it is the execution of a movable body motion effect or the execution of a movable body motion effect.

Furthermore, when displaying an image compatible with movable body motion effects on the image display device 5, the visibility of the image compatible with movable body motion effects may be reduced by lowering the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5. By doing this, when the movable body motion performance is executed, the player's attention can be increased to the movable body motion performance rather than the image corresponding to the movable body motion performance.

Further, when displaying an image compatible with movable body motion suggestion performance on the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance corresponding to the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance is output from the speaker 8L8R, and at the same time, the image display device 5 When displaying an image compatible with movable body movement effects in , the speaker 8L8R may output a sound corresponding to the movable body movement effects corresponding to the image compatible with movable body movement effects. By doing so, it is possible to output sounds corresponding to each image displayed on the image display device 5 from the speakers 8L and 8R when performing the movable body motion suggestion production and when performing the movable body motion production. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the movable body motion suggestion production or the movable body motion production is in progress.

Furthermore, when performing a movable body motion performance during the reach performance (when the variable display result becomes a jackpot), the movable body motion performance is displayed on the image display device 5 from a timing before the start of the movable body motion performance. Display of an image corresponding to body movement performance may be started. By doing this, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the start of the movable body motion performance during the reach performance of the super reach, and it is also possible to increase attention to the movable body motion performance.

In addition, in the feature section 109SG, in the reach effect of super reach α1 and super reach α2, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 toward the first movable body 109SG401 as movable body motion suggestion effect A. Although a mode in which the display is displayed moving at the speed V1 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification example 109SG-7, the speed V1 is not a constant speed but within a predetermined range. It may be variable. In this case, for example, as movable body motion suggestion production A, when a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401, the speed of the star-shaped effect images 109SG005S is set to the first movable body 109SG401. The speed V1 is changed to a low speed as the speed V1 approaches . Note that the speed V2 of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S during execution of the movable body motion production A may be set to be faster than the maximum speed of the speed V1. By doing this, when the movable body motion suggestion effect A is executed, the moving speed (velocity V1) of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 changes, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. can.

In addition, the characteristic section 109SG outputs 1 action suggestion sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the execution of the movable body motion suggestion presentation, and outputs 1 jackpot notification from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the execution of the movable body motion suggestion presentation. Although the form in which sound is output is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of sounds may be output as the action suggestion sound and jackpot notification sound output from these speakers 8L and 8R. .

Furthermore, in the case where multiple sounds can be output as the action suggestion sound and jackpot notification sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, multiple output start timings of the action suggestion sound and jackpot notification sound are provided, and the operation can be performed at any of the timings. It may be possible to output different sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R depending on whether the output of the suggestion sound or jackpot notification sound is started. By doing this, the player can easily recognize that the movable body motion suggestion production or the movable body motion production is being executed by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and also Since these action suggestion sounds and jackpot notification sounds change, the game's interest can be improved.

In particular, when determining the output timing of the motion suggestion sound from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be determined at different rates depending on the variable display result. In this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the output of the action suggestion sound starts, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Further, when determining the output timing of the jackpot notification sound from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be determined at different rates depending on the type of jackpot or the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. In this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the output of the jackpot notification sound starts, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic section 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved at a constant speed between the retracted position and the suggested position during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect. Although the embodiment is illustrated in which the first movable body 109SG401 is moved back and forth between the retreat position and the suggested position, the present invention is not limited to this. , the first movable body 109SG401 may be temporarily stopped at the retreated position and the suggested position, or the first movable body 109SG401 may be decelerated or accelerated at a position near the retreated position and the suggested position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent step-out from occurring in the first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401.

Further, in the feature section 109SG, after the movable body motion suggestion performance is finished, the first movable body 109SG401 is made to wait at the retreat position until the movable body motion performance or the deviation notification performance is started. The present invention is not limited to this, but after the movable body motion suggestion performance is finished, the first movable body 109SG401 is made to stand by at the suggested position until the movable body motion performance or miss notification performance is started. Good too. By doing so, when the movable body motion performance is executed, the first movable body 109SG401 can be immediately moved to the performance position, so that the game enjoyment can be improved. Furthermore, since the first movable body 109SG401 is maintained at the suggested position after the movable body motion suggestion performance is finished, it is possible to arouse the player's expectations for the execution of the movable body motion performance.

In addition, in the feature section 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the rising speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is different between the execution of the movable body motion suggestion production and the execution of the movable body motion production. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rising speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is made different between when the movable body motion suggestion production is executed and when the movable body motion production is executed. Good too.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the characteristic section 109SG also controls updating of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5, and controls movable bodies (first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) based on control timers, the present invention is not limited to this, and the update control of the effect images displayed on the image display device 5 and the movement control of the movable body In addition to the movement control, the lighting control of the LED provided in the pachinko game machine 1, the output control of the effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc. may also be executed based on each dedicated control timer.

In addition, when performing update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5, movement control of the movable body, lighting control of the LED, and output control of the effect sound in this way, for example, the effect control image is updated every 1 ms. The CPU 120 executes a timer interrupt (executes S73 to S77 of the production control main processing shown in FIG. 8 every 1 ms), updates the production image every 33 ms, controls the movement of the movable body every 1 ms, and controls the LED. The lighting control may be executed every 10 ms, and the output control of the performance sound may be executed every 1 ms. In particular, when executing the update control of the effect image, the lighting control of the LED, and the output control of the effect sound, the movement control of the movable body (motor 109SG421 for the first movable body, motor 109SG422 for the second movable body, motor 109SG422 for the third movable body, Since the drive control of the motor 109SG423) is executed together, the movement control of the movable body, the update control of the effect image, the lighting control of the LED, and the output control of the effect sound can be suitably executed.

Further, in the feature section 109SG, a mode in which the movable body LED 109SG495 is made to emit light during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LED 109SG495 may have a plurality of light emission modes. The rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled may be changed depending on the manner in which the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light during execution of the movable body motion suggestion performance.

In addition, in the feature section 109SG, a mode in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggestion effect A has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of display modes are provided for the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S to be displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggestion production A, and the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed in any of the modes as the movable body motion suggestion production A. The rate at which the jackpot gaming state is controlled may be varied depending on the situation.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-25, the feature section 109SG displays the reciprocating motion of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retreat position and the suggested position (movable body motion suggestion effect) during the third enlarged display period. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the reciprocating motion of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is also performed during the third enlarged display period. You may set up a case. In particular, in some cases where the variable display result is a jackpot, the first movable body 109SG401 can reciprocate between the retracted position and the suggested position during the third enlarged display period. Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the first movable body 109SG401 moves back and forth between the retreat position and the suggested position during the display period, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic section 109SG, the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are moved toward the first movable body 109SG401 (movable body motion suggestion effect A), or the first movable body 109SG401 is moved between the retreat position and the suggested position. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the execution of movable body motion performance A or movable body motion performance B is suggested by repeatedly moving (movable body motion suggestion performance B), the present invention is not limited to this; Execution of the movable body movement effect A or the movable body movement effect B may be suggested in a manner other than the display of the image or the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 itself. For example, if the first movable body 109SG401 is equipped with an LED (movable body LED 109SG495) as shown in the feature section 109SG, the movable body motion effect A or the movable body motion is determined by lighting, blinking cycle, lighting color, etc. of the LED. It may also suggest that performance B be performed.

In addition, in the feature section 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, the contrast between the images of the friendly character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B on the image display device 5 is used as a movable body motion suggestion effect A. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed in a reduced state (see FIGS. 10-28(D) and 10-30(D)), the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the movable body motion suggestion effect A is performed at a timing before lowering the contrast between the image of the friendly character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B on the image display device 5 (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28(C) The display of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S may be started from the timing shown in FIG. 10-30(C).

Note that when starting to display the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at a timing before lowering the contrast between the images of the friendly character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B on the image display device 5 in this way, By increasing the transparency of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S, the effect images being displayed on the image display device 5 (in the examples of FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, the friendly character A and the enemy character A) Alternatively, the image of the enemy character B) may be made more visible than when the contrast is lowered.

In addition, in the feature section 109SG, as shown in FIG. 10-29(G), an explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 when the movable body motion effect is executed; Although a part of the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion becomes invisible due to the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image may be displayed when the moving body movement effect is executed. It is also possible to display the explosion effect image 109SG005B or an image dedicated to movable body movement effects in the entire display area of the device 5, and make all other effect images invisible.

In addition, in the feature section 109SG, a mode in which the movable body motion performance is executed during the reach performance of super reach is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing to execute the movable body motion performance is as follows: It may be performed at a timing other than during the reach performance of Super Reach. For example, as modification example 109SG-8, the combinations of decorative patterns are It may be possible to execute the movable body motion performance during the period from when the reach is reached until the start timing of the reach performance of the super reach.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-36(B), the moving body movement suggestion effect is started after reaching the reach position, and the image display device 5 displays the reach effect to be performed after this with high expectation level (jackpot). (for example, reach performances of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 described in the feature section 109SG) and low expectation level (big hit game state) Which of the reach performances (for example, reach performances with lower expectations than the reach performances of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 described in the feature section 109SG) As a branching effect that displays an image of a character with its eyes closed as a branching effect to notify whether to branch to a branch, as shown in FIG. The character is gradually enlarged and displayed.

If the variable display is a variable display that executes a low-expectation reach effect, it is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 10-37(C) to 10-37(E). The display area of the image display device 5 gradually darkens without the character there opening its eyes. In other words, in this branching effect, the character displayed on the image display device 5 may go dark without opening its eyes, so that a reach effect with high expectations will not be executed (a reach effect with low expectations will be executed). be notified. Then, after the display area of the image display device 5 is completely darkened (after the branching effect is completed), a low-expectation ready-to-reach effect is executed.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display that executes a reach effect with high expectations, it is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 10-37(F) to 10-37(H). By opening the eyes of the character who is playing the game, it is announced that a highly anticipated reach effect will be executed. Moreover, at this time, a movable body motion effect is also executed. Then, after the movable body motion performance and the branch performance are completed, a highly anticipated reach performance is executed.

In other words, the movable body motion performance may be executed as a performance to notify that the jackpot game state will be controlled as exemplified in the feature section 109SG, but it may also be performed as a performance to notify that a highly expected reach performance will be executed. It may be performed as a performance (a performance that notifies that the expectation level of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is high).

In addition, in this modified example 109SG-8, as shown in FIGS. 10-36(B) and 10-37(C), the character with its eyes closed is gradually enlarged and displayed on the image display device 5 as a branch effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a character whose eyes are closed is gradually enlarged and displayed as a branch effect, the image display device 5 At the same time, by displaying an effect image such as a concentrated line, the player may be able to draw attention to whether or not the character opens its eyes.

As described above, in the feature section 109SG, the present invention is applied as a branch for determining whether or not the variable display result becomes a jackpot during the reach effect of Super Reach, but in this modification example 109SG-8. As shown, the present invention may be applied to determine which of the low-expected ready-to-reach effects and high-expected ready-to-reach effects are executed. In this case, the specific image in the present invention is an image of the character (the first specific image is an image of the character with its eyes closed, the second specific image is an image of the character with its eyes open), the effect image in the present invention corresponds to the above-mentioned image of concentrated lines, etc.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, in this modification example 109SG-8, when performing the movable body movement performance as a performance to notify that a reach performance with high expectations will be executed, Although a form in which the movable body motion suggestion performance is executed before the execution of the movable body motion performance is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body motion suggestion performance may not be executed. Further, the execution rate of the movable body motion performance may be different between when the movable body motion suggestion performance is executed and when the movable body motion suggestion performance is not performed (the rate at which the highly expected ready-to-reach performance is executed is different).

Further, although a plurality of characteristic parts and modifications are disclosed in this specification, the gaming machine of the present invention can be implemented by combining two or more of these plurality of characteristic parts and modifications. You may.

Further, in the feature section 109SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as a gaming machine that plays a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a gaming machine that plays a predetermined game is defined as a gaming machine that plays at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, it may be a slot machine or a general game machine as long as it performs the following.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiments and other embodiments described below, even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is movably provided,
A specific performance that notifies the performance result by operating the movable body (for example, movable body motion performance A or movable body motion performance B), and repeatedly moves the movable body before the specific performance is executed. Suggestive effects that suggest that the specific effect is to be executed (for example, movable body movement suggestion effect A or movable body movement suggestion effect B), and effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (a part that executes the variable display processing shown in 10-19);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
When executing the suggestion effect, the effect image for the movable body is not displayed, while when executing the specific effect, the effect image for the movable body is displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 to 10-35). As shown, while the movable body motion suggestion production B is executed, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is not displayed on the image display device 5, while the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion production B. ),
A specific image is displayed while the suggested effect is being executed, and the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach effect of super reach β1) If so, ally character B and enemy character A will be displayed, and ally character B and enemy character A will be enlarged and displayed, and if super reach β2 is in reach effect, ally character B and enemy character B will be (The part where the friendly character B and enemy character B are enlarged and displayed)
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, an effect image for the specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, the image display device 5, the part that displays the effect image 109SG005X),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in Figure 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2, in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach performance, (The part where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect execution means is different from the update cycle of the specific image and the effect image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms, whereas the update period of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms),
The enlargement speed in the enlarged display is different between the first timing in the enlarged display and the second timing after the first timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, portions where the enlargement speed differs between the display period and the second enlarged display period),
The operating speed of the movable body in the suggestive effect is the same at the first timing and the second timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. (portion where the operating speed of the movable body 109SG401 is the same in the 2 enlarged display periods),
moreover,
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., pending display and active display) corresponding to the variable display;
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
A specific display effect that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a part that displays a pending display or an active display in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ) ), and a specific light emitting effect (for example, a flash effect when winning a prize) that causes the light emitting means to emit light,
In the specific display effect, the specific light emission effect is executed so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed (for example, FIG. 11-28, FIG. 11- As shown in 29(A) to FIG. 11-32(H) and FIG. 11-49(A) to FIG. 11-50(D), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts before the pending display is completed. (the part that lights up),
The rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emitting effect is executed than when the specific light emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-24, when the winning flash effect is executed, (If the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning, the percentage of control to be in the jackpot gaming state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed)
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g. winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g. main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body). lamp 9d);
The first light emitting means includes a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous period winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous period winning flash effect); A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect (for example, from the start of the late winning flash effect to the start timing of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F has a brightness of C1 and (The part that blinks at cycle T1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the brightness is C2 and blinks at cycle T2),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner that corresponds to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner that corresponds to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, in FIG. 11-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d flash at a brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period. During the period, the part that blinks at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T0) is an example of a gaming machine.
According to this feature, it is possible to make the enlarged display of a specific image and the effect movement of the movable body even more conspicuous by using the effect image, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. Furthermore, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. By causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, it is possible to make the specific light emitting effect more conspicuous. This makes it even easier for players to recognize.

In other words, it is possible to improve the game's interest by making the effect image more conspicuous of the performance actions of the movable body, and also to make it easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission performance based on the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. It can be used as a machine. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that, when installed in a gaming parlor, easily attracts players' interest and whose presentation is easy for players to understand.

Further, the specific image and the light emitting means may be associated with each other. For example, it is preferable that the light emitting means emits light in accordance with the timing and period during which the specific image is displayed in an enlarged manner. By doing so, it becomes possible to clearly inform the player that the specific image is displayed in an enlarged manner.

Furthermore, a specific light emission effect may be executed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body. In this case, it is preferable that the specific light emission effect emits light in a manner that emphasizes the movement of the movable body. By doing so, you can create a suitable performance and improve the interest.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine that can improve interest, there is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that can perform a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine 1),
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., pending display and active display) corresponding to the variable display;
A specific display effect that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a part that displays a pending display or an active display in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ) ), and a specific light emitting effect (for example, a flash effect when winning a prize) that causes the light emitting means to emit light;
Equipped with
The effect executing means executes the specific light emitting effect so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIG. -28, as shown in Figures 11-29 (A) to 11-32 (H), and Figures 11-49 (A) to 11-50 (D), before the display of the pending display is completed. The part that lights up the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning a prize),
The rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emitting effect is executed than when the specific light emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-24, when the winning flash effect is executed, (If the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning, the percentage of control to be in the jackpot gaming state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed)
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g. winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g. main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body). lamp 9d);
The first light emitting means includes a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous period winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous period winning flash effect); A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect (for example, from the start of the late winning flash effect to the start timing of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F has a brightness of C1 and (The part that blinks at cycle T1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the brightness is C2 and blinks at cycle T2),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner that corresponds to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner that corresponds to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, in FIG. 11-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d flash at a brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period. (during the period, the part flashes at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0), and a gaming machine. Examples include gaming machines. An example of the form of this gaming machine will be explained below as another example of the form.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(form)
Type 1 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., pending display and active display) corresponding to the variable display;
A specific display effect that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a part that displays a pending display or an active display in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ) , a specific display start effect) and a specific light emission effect that causes the light emitting means to emit light (for example, a flash effect when winning a prize);
Equipped with
The effect executing means executes the specific light emitting effect so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIG. -28, as shown in Figures 11-29 (A) to 11-32 (H), and Figures 11-49 (A) to 11-50 (D), before the display of the pending display is completed. The part that lights up the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning a prize),
The rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emitting effect is executed than when the specific light emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-24, when the winning flash effect is executed, (If the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning, the percentage of control to be in the jackpot gaming state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed)
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g. winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g. main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body). lamp 9d);
The first light emitting means includes a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect); A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect (for example, from the start of the late winning flash effect to the start timing of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F has a brightness of C1 and (The part that blinks at cycle T1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the brightness is C2 and blinks at cycle T2),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner that corresponds to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner that corresponds to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, in FIG. 11-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d flash at a brightness of C1 and at a cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period. During the period, the part blinks at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0).
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect In this case, the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous by causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the specific display.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
The specific display effect is performed by an appearance effect section (for example, FIG. 11-15, FIG. 11-30(D) to FIG. 11-32(H), FIG. 11-49(B)) where the appearance effect of the specific display is executed. ~ As shown in Figure 11-50 (D), the part where the appearance animation in which the pending display and active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top is displayed by the performance control CPU 120 executing the specific display start performance execution process. ), and a periodic effect part (for example, FIG. 11-15, FIG. 11-30(D) to FIG. 11-32 (H), FIG. 11-49 (B) to FIG. 11-50 (D), the performance control CPU 120 executes the specific display rotation display performance execution process, so that the suspended display and active display is displayed as a rotating animation), and
The timing at which the display of the specific display is completed is the start timing of the periodic effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-19 and 11-20, from the timing at which the appearance animation of the pending display or active display is completed, (The part where the rotation animation of these pending and active displays starts)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the specific display.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is the gaming machine described in Form 1 or Form 2,
The effect executing means can start the specific light emitting effect before the start of the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-29(A) to 11-32(H), When executing start effect B, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body are activated as a winning flash effect from a timing before the display of the pending display or active display starts. (The part where the lamp 9d emits light)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the specific light emission effect is started before the start of the specific display effect, the specific light emission effect can be made more conspicuous.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 3,
The specific display effect includes an appearance effect in which the specific display appears (for example, a specific display start effect),
The display means displays the specific display in a plurality of different display modes (for example, a specific display start effect A that only executes an appearance animation in which a pending display and an active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top, and a first pending display in which the character A is It can be displayed in a specific display start effect B) that executes an appearance animation in which the pending display and active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top after acting on the memory display area 135SG005D and the active display area 135SG005A,
The period of the appearance effect varies depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, specific display start effect A is 0.2 seconds and specific display start effect B is 1.2 seconds),
The specific light emission effect is started before the end timing of the shortest appearance effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 and 11-49(A) to 11-50(D) , the part where the winning flash effect starts before the end timing of specific display start effect A)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of the display mode of the specific display, the specific light emission effect can be started before the appearance effect ends, so that the player can surely see the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. Recognizable.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 4,
The effect executing means starts the specific light emitting effect after once controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to a low brightness state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, FIG. 11-29(A), 11-29(B), FIG. 11-49(A), and FIG. 11-49(B), when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, once the winning flash lamp 135SG009F , the part that turns off the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission performance.
Note that the "low brightness state" in this invention includes not only a state in which light is emitted at low brightness but also a state in which no light is emitted.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 5,
The effect execution means starts the specific light emitting effect after once controlling the display means to a low visibility state (for example, as shown in Modification Example 135SG-11, when executing a flash effect at the time of winning, the image (The part that starts the flash effect at the time of winning after reducing the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 by reducing the brightness of the backlight etc. built into the display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission performance.
Note that the "low visibility state" in this invention is a state in which the visibility of the display means is lower than the previous state, and the visibility of the display is reduced by a method other than reducing the brightness of the display means. It also includes a degraded state.

The gaming machine of Form 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 6,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a preview effect) that suggests that the variable display will be controlled in an advantageous state while executing the variable display, and is capable of executing a suggestive effect that indicates that the variable display will be controlled in an advantageous state. The specific light emitting effect can be executed even when the As shown in (n), the part where the winning flash effect can be executed depending on whether the preview effect is being executed or not),
A variable display compatible sound corresponding to the variable display (the variable display compatible sound shown in FIG. 11-28), a suggestive performance compatible sound corresponding to the suggestive performance (the preview performance compatible sound shown in FIG. 11-29(A)), Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect (sound corresponding to the winning flash effect shown in FIG. 11-29(B)),
The sound output means includes:
When the specific light emitting effect is executed while the variable display compatible sound is being output, the specific light emitting effect compatible sound can be output with priority over the variable display compatible sound that is being output (for example, As shown in Figure 11-29 (B), when executing the winning flash effect while the variable display is being executed, the variable display compatible sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, while the winning flash effect is supported. part that outputs sound at volume V1 (V1>V2)),
When the specific light emitting effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect is being output, the sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect can be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect being output (for example, As shown in FIG. 11-29 (B), when executing the winning flash effect during the execution of the preview effect, the sound corresponding to the preview effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, while the winning flash effect is supported. The part that outputs the sound at volume V1 (V1>V2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the sound corresponding to the variable display or the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect is output, the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be easily heard, and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect allows the player to execute the specific light emission effect. It becomes easier to recognize.

The gaming machine of Form 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 7,
Equipped with sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) capable of outputting sound,
The effect executing means outputs a sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect from the sound output means before the display of the specific display is completed and the light emitting means emits light in the specific light emitting effect (for example, FIG. 11-28 , As shown in Figures 11-29(A) to 11-32(H), and Figures 11-49(A) to 11-50(D), execution of the winning flash effect is determined in response to the starting winning. (If this is the case, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect will start from the speakers 8L and 8R, and then the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will start, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display will be completed.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize that the predetermined condition is met by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 7,
Equipped with sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) capable of outputting sound,
In the specific light emission effect, the effect execution means includes:
A sound corresponding to a specific light emission effect can be output from the sound output means (for example, a part capable of outputting a sound corresponding to a flash effect when winning a prize from speakers 8L and 8R),
The light emitting means is caused to emit light before the completion of the display of the specific display and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-12, execution of a winning flash effect in response to a winning start) If it is determined, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display is completed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can quickly recognize that the predetermined condition has been met by the light emitted from the light emitting means, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 9,
The specific light emitting effect is such that during the first period, the first light emitting means emits light in a predetermined manner that corresponds to the specific light emitting effect, and during the second period, the first light emitting means emits light in a predetermined manner that is more emphasized than the predetermined manner. This is a performance that emits light in a specific manner with a low degree of intensity (for example, as shown in Figure 11-28, during the execution period of the first-term winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at brightness C1, and the second-term winning flash is flashed at brightness C1, During the execution period of the time flash effect, the part where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 (C1>C2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by causing at least the first light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined manner, the player can be made aware of the start of a specific light emitting effect, and the first light emitting means continues to emit light in a predetermined manner during the second period as well. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting due to the light emitting and interfering with other performances.
Note that the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" in the present invention includes a low-speed blinking mode where the degree of emphasis is low due to a slow blinking speed.

The gaming machine of Form 11 is the gaming machine according to Form 10,
The second period includes a period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is executed, and a period during which the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is being executed (for example, in FIG. 11-28 As shown in , the execution period of the late winning flash effect includes the period during which the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is executed, and the execution period of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect. period),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first light emitting means emits light in a specific manner before and after the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 12 is the gaming machine described in Form 10 or Form 11,
The first light emitting means emits light in the predetermined manner when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13, when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started, the first light emitting means emits light in the predetermined manner). When a certain variable display starts, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at a brightness of C1 and a cycle of T1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 12,
The display means displays a specific light emission effect compatible image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in a first display mode during the first period, and displays the specific light emission effect compatible image from the first display mode during the second period. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, and when the winning period in the second period is During the execution period of the flash effect, the part that displays the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the first period, the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be displayed on the display means in the first display mode to make the player recognize the start of the specific light emission effect, and in the second period, the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be displayed in the first display mode. By displaying the image compatible with the specific light emission effect in the second display mode by the means, the display means continues to display the image compatible with the specific light emission effect in the first display mode, which obstructs other displays and reduces the interest in the game. It is possible to suppress the decline.

The gaming machine of Form 14 is the gaming machine according to Form 13,
The display means displays the specific light emission compatible image in a first display mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13, (a portion for displaying the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 14,
comprising a sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect corresponding to the specific light emission effect;
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in a first output mode during the first period, and does not output the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the second period, or outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect at a higher intensity than the first output mode. Output in the second output mode with a lower level (For example, as shown in Figure 11-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1. and during the execution period of the flash performance at the time of winning in the latter half, the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is output from speakers 8l and 8R at a volume of V2 (V1>V2)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the specific light emission effect has started, and it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the specific light emission effect has started. During execution, the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect is not output or is output in the second output mode, so that it is possible to suppress a decline in game interest due to other effects being obstructed by the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect. .

The gaming machine of Form 16 is the gaming machine described in Form 15,
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13). (a part that outputs a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume of V1 when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 16,
The first light emitting means stops emitting light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during a display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-69 in the modified example 135SG-1, the production control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation command from the speakers 8L and 8R during the execution of the flash production at the time of late prize winning.) The pattern is confirmed by stopping the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect when winning a prize, turning off the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning a prize, hiding the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5, clearing the process timer for the flash effect when winning a prize in the later period, etc. During the period, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect as the flash effect during the later period, the emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S will not be executed, and the first variable display start command will be received. Based on this, by reselecting the process table for the flash effect at the time of winning the second term and resetting and starting the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning the second term, the flash effect at the time of winning the second term (flash at the time of winning the term (The part that starts the output of the sound corresponding to the performance, the emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by temporarily stopping the light emission of the light emitting means, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the variable display is continuing.

The gaming machine of Form 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 17,
A gaming machine capable of performing a re-variable display performance (for example, a pseudo continuous performance) in which the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display is started until the display result is derived, and then the variable display is displayed again.
The first light emitting means is configured to respond to the specific light emitting effect during a temporary stop when a re-variable display effect is executed during the second period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect is started. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-69 and FIG. 11-70(A) to FIG. 11-89(n) as modified example 135SG-1, the flash effect is the subject of winning.) During the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern in the variable display that is executed before the variable display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from misperceiving that the variable display has ended even though it is temporarily stopped.

The gaming machine of Form 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 18,
A gaming machine capable of performing a re-variable display performance (for example, a pseudo continuous performance) in which the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display is started until the display result is derived, and then the variable display is displayed again,
The first light emitting means is
Even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the second period (for example, as modified example 135SG-1, FIGS. 11-69 and 11-70 (A ) ~ As shown in FIG. 11-89(n), even during the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the period T2),
Even during a temporary stop when the re-variable display effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, the light emission continues in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as modification 135SG-1) As shown in Figures 11-69 and 11-70 (A) to Figure 11-89 (n), during the temporary suspension period of the decorative symbols in the variable display that are subject to the winning flash effect, the winning flash part of the lamp 135SG009F that continues to blink at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T2),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 18, characterized in that:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously believing that the variable display has ended despite the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of Form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 16,
The first light emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during a display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect. (For example, as shown in Figures 11-29 (A) to 11-48 (n), during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the later period, before the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize is started) During the previous variable display pattern confirmation period, the part where the flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink when winning a prize),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by continuing to emit light during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period, the player's expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is targeted by the specific light emitting effect. It is possible to accurately maintain the variable display until the start of the variable display, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 21 is the gaming machine according to Form 20,
The display means is capable of variably displaying first performance identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) and variable display of second performance identification information (for example, a small pattern) whose visibility is lower than that of the first performance identification information. A gaming machine,
During the result display period, the second production identification information in the stopped state is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-33 (J), during the symbol confirmation period, the small symbols are displayed variably. (the part displayed when the is stopped),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the light emission continues during the result display period, the second effect identification information in the stopped state is displayed, so the player can be made aware that it is the result display period.

The gaming machine of Form 22 is the gaming machine according to Form 21,
The display means can display a specific light emission performance corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emission performance in the second period so as not to overlap with the display of the second performance identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-33 (J)). As shown in FIG. 3, while the winning flash effect is being executed, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5. 1 display area 135SG005F (part displayed at the left end),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the end of the variable display due to the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect being displayed overlappingly with the display of the second effect identification information.

The gaming machine of Form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 22,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance (for example, a reach performance of super reach) that suggests control to be in an advantageous state,
When the specific effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, the first light emitting means emits light in a manner according to the specific light emission effect until the specific effect is started, and When the performance starts, it starts emitting light in a manner corresponding to the specific performance (for example, as shown in Figure 11-90 as modification 135SG-2, the super reach that is the target of the flash performance at the time of winning is variable). In the display, before the start of the super reach reach effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is flashed at a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and from the start timing of the super reach reach effect, the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at a brightness of C2. part to light),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the specific performance is started, the light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific performance instead of in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission performance, so that the game interest of the specific performance can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 24 is the gaming machine according to Form 23,
The display means is capable of displaying a specific effect start image corresponding to the start of the specific effect when the specific effect is started (for example, FIG. 11-96(K) to FIG. 11-98(O)). , as shown in FIGS. 11-104(K) to 11-106(O), a portion where the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (whiteout),
The first light emitting means enters a low brightness state when the display of the display means switches to the specific effect start image, and after entering the low brightness state, emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in 11-90, during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and then the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at brightness C2 from the start timing of Super Reach's reach effect.) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes with a low brightness state accompanying the change to the specific performance start image, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to these changes in the light emitting mode. Since this can be prevented, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 25 is the gaming machine described in Form 23 or Form 24,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The performance execution means suggests, as the specific performance, an action performance that causes the movable body to move at the start of the specific performance (for example, a movable body movement performance shown in FIG. 11-90), and execution of the motion performance. It is possible to perform a motion suggestion performance (for example, a movable body motion suggestion performance shown in FIG. 11-90),
The first light emitting means enters a low brightness state when executing the action suggesting effect, and after entering the low brightness state, emits light in a manner corresponding to the action effect which is a mode corresponding to the specific effect (for example, , as shown in Figure 11-90, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect during the whiteout period, and the winning flash is turned off from the start timing of the super reach reach effect thereafter. The part that lights up the lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes with a low brightness state accompanying the execution of the suggestive effect, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to these changes in the light emitting mode. As a result, you can increase your interest in playing games.

The gaming machine of Form 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 25,
The first light emitting means is
When a special performance different from the specific light emission performance is executed by the performance execution means, it is possible to emit light in a manner corresponding to the special performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-108(A) as modification 135SG-3). (As shown in FIG. 1), when performing a step-up effect during a variable display in which a winning flash effect is not being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be lit in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect.
When the specific light emitting effect is started during the execution of the special effect, the light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect with priority over a manner corresponding to the special effect (for example, modification 135SG-3 As shown in Figure 11-108(B), when a step-up effect is executed during a variable display in which a winning flash effect is being executed, the winning flash lamp is set in a manner corresponding to the winning flash effect. 135SG009F continues to light up (flashing)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect from being started at an inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the special effect.

The gaming machine of Form 27 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 26,
The first light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, when it ends at a first timing during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect, and at a second timing after the first timing. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-119(A) and 11-119(B) as modification example 135SG-4, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F responds to the winning flash effect. The timing to end the light emitting mode is the timing to start the movable body movement performance during the variable display that is the target of the flash performance when winning a prize, and the timing to start the reach performance of super reach),
When the light emission of the first light emitting means in a manner according to the specific light emission effect ends at the first timing, and when the light emission of the first light emitting means in a manner according to the specific light emission effect ends at the second timing. The rate at which the winning state is controlled to be advantageous differs depending on the end of the game. Expectation level of jackpot in the case where the light emission mode is changed from the start timing of the movable body movement performance according to the light emission mode according to the movable body movement performance, and when the light emission mode is changed according to the said reach performance from the start timing of the reach performance. (different parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the light emission ends in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 28 is the gaming machine described in Form 27,
The effect executed by the effect execution means at the time of the end is different depending on when the light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at the first timing and when it ends at the second timing. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-119 as modification example 135SG-4, during the execution period of the movable body movement effect, depending on the timing of ending the light emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, In some cases, it may be during the execution period of Super Reach's reach effect),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize whether the end timing is the first timing or the second timing.

The gaming machine of Form 29 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 28,
The performance execution means executes a first performance (for example, a movable body movement performance shown in FIG. 11-119 as a modification example 135SG-4) and a second performance different from the first performance (for example, a modification example 135SG-4) during variable display. -4, it is possible to execute the super reach reach performance shown in Figure 11-119),
The first light emitting means is
With the execution of the first effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it is possible to change the light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to the light emission mode in a mode corresponding to the first effect (for example, As shown in FIG. 11-119(A) as modification example 135SG-4, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the start timing of the movable body movement performance to the movable body. (The part that changes the lighting mode according to the motion effect),
With the execution of the second effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, the light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be changed to the light emission mode in a mode corresponding to the second effect (for example, As shown in FIG. 11-119(B) as modification example 135SG-4, the part that changes the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the start timing of the reach effect to the light emission mode according to the reach effect),
When changing from a mode of light emission corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode of light emission corresponding to the first effect, and when changing from a mode of light emission corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode of light emission corresponding to the second effect. The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled differs depending on the time (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-119(C) as a modified example 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed depending on the winning flash performance). The expectation level of jackpot is different depending on the case where the light emission mode is set according to the movable body movement performance from the start timing of the movable body movement performance and the case where the light emission mode is set according to the reach performance from the start timing of the reach performance. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 30 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 28,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The performance execution means controls an action performance that causes the movable body to move (for example, a movable body motion performance), a motion suggestion performance that suggests execution of the motion performance (for example, a movable body motion suggestion performance), and an advantageous state. It is possible to carry out a specific performance (for example, a reach performance of super reach) that suggests that the
The first light emitting means is
With the execution of the action suggestion effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, the light emission can change from a mode of light emission corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode corresponding to the action suggestion effect (for example, a modified example). As shown in 135SG-4, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body motion suggesting performance from the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting performance. parts to be changed),
With the execution of the specific effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it is possible to change the light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to the light emission mode in a mode corresponding to the specific effect (for example, a modified example As shown in 135SG-4, a part that changes the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect from the start timing of the super reach effect. ),
The rate at which the light is controlled to an advantageous state is different when changing from the light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to the mode corresponding to the action suggestion effect and when changing to the light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, , as shown in Modified Example 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting performance according to the movable body motion suggesting performance. (The part where the jackpot expectation level differs depending on the lighting mode and the lighting mode depending on the reach effect from the start timing of the reach effect),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 31 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 30,
The display modes of the specific display include a normal mode (for example, display pattern α), a special mode (for example, display pattern δ and display pattern ε shown in FIG. 11-120 as modification 135SG-5), and a special mode (for example, display pattern β and display pattern γ).
The special aspect includes a first special aspect (for example, display pattern γ) and a second special aspect (for example, display pattern β) different from the first special aspect,
When the specific display is displayed in the first special mode, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the second special mode (for example, in FIGS. 11-17 As shown in the figure, when the pending display or the active display is displayed in the display pattern γ, the part that is controlled to be in the jackpot gaming state at a higher rate than when it is displayed in the display pattern β),
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-120 as modification 135SG-5, the display pattern δ or The part where the pending display or active display displayed in display pattern ε can be changed to the pending display or active display in display pattern β or display pattern γ),
When the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the percentage of execution of the specific light emitting effect is higher than when it is displayed in the special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 11 as Modification 135SG-5). As shown in 120, when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, it is easier to win a prize than when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern β and the display pattern γ. (parts where flash effects are executed at a high rate),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a specific display is displayed in a special mode, by executing a specific light emitting effect at a high rate, it is determined whether the special mode changes to the first special mode or the second special mode. It is possible to draw the attention of the players to the game, and improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 32 is the gaming machine according to Form 31,
The special mode is a mode of a specific color (for example, blinking white as shown in FIG. 11-120 as modification example 135SG-5),
The special aspect is an aspect of a special color different from the specific color (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-17, blue or red),
The normal mode is a mode of a color other than the specific color and the special color (for example, white),
The specific display of the specific color changes to the special color at a higher rate when the specific light emitting effect is being executed than when the specific light emitting effect is not being executed (for example, Modified Example 135SG-5 As shown in , when a pending display or an active display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is displayed depending on whether or not the winning flash effect is executed. parts with different rates of change to pattern β and display pattern γ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the difference in the mode of specific display can be easily understood by the difference in color, and when a specific display of a specific color is displayed, the player pays attention to whether or not a specific light emission effect is being executed. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 33 is the gaming machine according to Form 31 or Form 32,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a change suggestion effect that suggests that the specific display displayed in the special mode changes to the special mode in a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode. (For example, a part where the first effect and second effect shown in Modification Example 135SG-5 can be executed),
The special mode changes to the special mode at a higher rate when the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode than when it is executed in the first mode (for example, in Modified Example 135SG-5). As shown in , the second effect can change the specific display to display pattern β or display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect by acting on the specific display displayed in display pattern δ. The part that is a performance),
When the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode, the specific light emission effect is executed at a higher rate than when it is executed in the first mode (for example, in Modification 135SG-5). As shown, when the second effect is executed, the winning flash effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first effect is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the change suggestion effect is executed in the first mode or the second mode, and the change suggestion effect is executed in the first mode by executing the specific light emission effect. It is possible to increase expectations for the implementation in two ways.

The gaming machine of Form 34 is the gaming machine according to Form 33,
The special mode is a first special mode in which the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode and the rate of change to the special mode is low (for example, the display pattern δ shown in FIG. 11-120 as modification 135SG-5). ), and a second special mode in which the rate at which the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode and changes to the special mode is higher than that in the first special mode (for example, as modified example 135SG-5 in FIG. 11-120 The display pattern ε) shown in
When the specific display is displayed in the second special mode, the percentage of execution of the specific light emitting effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the first special mode (for example, when the specific display is displayed in the first special mode) When the display pattern ε is displayed, the percentage of flash effects executed at the time of winning is higher than when the specific display is displayed using the display pattern δ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the specific display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode, and when the second special mode has a high rate of change to the special mode. Since the specific light emitting effect is executed at a high rate in the second special mode, the execution of the specific light emitting effect can increase expectations for the specific display to be displayed in the second special mode.

The gaming machine of Form 35 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 34,
The display means is capable of displaying a specific light emitting effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the specific light emitting effect so as to overlap a specific display corresponding to a variable display of a target of the specific light emitting effect (for example, As shown in modification example 135SG-7, a silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect when winning a prize can be displayed so as to overlap the active display in the active display area 135SG005A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the specific display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect can be easily recognized by the player, and the specific display can be hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, giving the player a sense of surprise and increasing the enjoyment of the game. can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 36 is the gaming machine according to Form 35,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of displays corresponding to the specific light emitting effect of different types (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-7, the display means is capable of displaying a plurality of displays corresponding to the specific light emitting effect of different sizes on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning). (portion where silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed),
The manner of overlapping with the specific display differs depending on the type of display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-129 (L) and FIG. 11-130 (N) as modification example 135SG-7) , a portion where the overlapping aspect of the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the displayed silhouette image 135SG005S)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a plurality of displays corresponding to specific light emitting effects are displayed, and the manner of overlapping with the specific display changes depending on the displayed display corresponding to specific light emitting effects, so that the game enjoyment can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 37 is the gaming machine according to Form 35 or Form 36,
The specific display includes a first specific display (for example, a pending display) corresponding to a variable display that has not been executed yet, and a second variable display (for example, an active display) that corresponds to a variable display that is being executed,
The display means can display the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect so as to overlap with the first specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started. In addition, during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it can be displayed so as to overlap with the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-7, Before the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect is started, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the pending display that is the object of the winning flash effect that is displayed in the first holding memory display area 135SG005D. , while the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is being executed, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the active display that is the target of the winning flash effect that is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the first specific display and the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, and not only the first specific display but also the second specific display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide even more surprises to the players and improve their enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Form 38 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 37,
A gaming machine capable of performing a re-variable display performance (for example, a pseudo continuous performance) in which the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display is started until the display result is derived, and then the variable display is displayed again,
The display means is capable of displaying a re-variable related display regarding the re-variable display effect, and displays a specific light emitting effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the specific light emitting effect, overlapping with the re-variable related display. (For example, when a pseudo continuous effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the winning flash effect, when the decorative pattern temporarily stops, it will stop in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. Special design (see Figure 11-40, etc.) where the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed overlappingly as a flash effect when winning a prize),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the re-variable related display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so it is possible to give surprise to the player and improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 39 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 35 to 38,
The display means can display the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, FIG. 11-28, FIG. 11-42(a) to FIG. 11-47( As shown in l), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display that is the subject of the flash effect when winning a prize),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the interest of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 40 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 39,
The performance execution means is
Even during the variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, the first light emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, and the variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect ends at a predetermined time. It is possible to control the effect to end the light emission at the timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be activated before the start of the ready-to-win effect). flashes at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T2, and turns off the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the start timing of the reach effect),
If the light emission of the first light emitting means in the manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect is not terminated at the predetermined end timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event, the first light emitting means is not terminated at a specific end timing subsequent to the predetermined end timing. Perform special end control to end the light emission of the light emitting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-22, the performance control CPU 120 determines that it is the start timing of the ready-to-reach performance of the variable display of the performance target due to the generation of static electricity, etc.) If this is not possible, at the end timing of the variable display (timing at which the symbol confirmation command is received), which is a timing later than the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect, a second-term winning flash effect including blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is performed again. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort when light emission in a mode corresponding to a specific light emission effect is not normally completed.

The gaming machine of Form 41 is the gaming machine according to Form 40,
Equipped with a game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
The game control means is capable of transmitting variable display end information that notifies the end of the variable display to the effect execution means when the variable display ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-4(A) , a part where the CPU 103 can send a symbol confirmation command that specifies the stop of the variable display of decorative symbols),
The performance execution means performs the specific end control based on receiving the variable display end information as the specific end timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-22, the performance control CPU 120 The part that ends the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half based on receiving the command),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further reduce the sense of discomfort when ending light emission in a manner that corresponds to a specific light emission effect.

The gaming machine of Form 42 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 39 to 41,
The predetermined end timing includes a first predetermined end timing and a second predetermined end timing. The part that can stop flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F),
The specific end timing is a timing later than the predetermined end timing and the second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-4, the effect control CPU 120 may cause the production control CPU 120 to trigger the winning flash when static electricity is generated, etc. If it is not possible to stop the blinking of the lamp 135SG009F, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will be started again at the end timing of the variable display, which is a timing later than the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect or the start timing of the reach effect. (The part that ends the flash performance when winning a prize in the second half)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the light emission cannot be ended at the second predetermined end timing, it is possible to end the light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect at the specific end timing.

The gaming machine of Form 43 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 42,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a specific performance (for example, a super reach performance) that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
If the predetermined condition is satisfied when the specific effect is being executed, the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. (The part that does not decide to execute the flash effect at the time of winning if a starting winning occurs)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to a specific performance.

The gaming machine of Form 44 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 43,
If the predetermined condition is satisfied when the remaining period of the variable display is the same as the predetermined period or shorter than the predetermined period, the effect execution means does not execute the specific light emitting effect, If the predetermined condition is satisfied for a period longer than the predetermined period, the specific light emission effect can be executed (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-8, when the first starting port is When a starting winning occurs, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is less than the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is not determined),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific display of the target of the specific light emitting effect from becoming difficult to understand due to the specific light emitting effect being executed when the remaining period of the variable display is short.

The gaming machine of Form 45 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 44,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests control to an advantageous state even in a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figure 11-9, even in a variable display where the variable display result is a failure). The part where you can perform the super reach reach effect),
When the predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect in a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state, the specific light emitting effect can be executed in response to the start of the next variable display of the variable display (for example, a modified As shown in Example 135SG-8, if a starting winning occurs at the first starting opening while the variable display is being executed, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period. If it is less than the execution period, the winning flash effect can be executed from the start timing of the next variable display, provided that the variable display result of the variable display is a loss),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific effect and the specific light emission effect from becoming less interesting due to the specific effect and the specific light emission effect being executed overlappingly.

The gaming machine of Form 46 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 45,
A specific area where the predetermined condition is satisfied when the game medium passes through (for example, the winning ball device 6A forming the first starting winning opening);
a specific light emitting means (for example, a starting port lamp 135SG009S) provided around the specific area and capable of emitting light in different light emission modes;
Equipped with
The display means can display the specific display in any one of a plurality of display modes that differ in the rate at which the specific display is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-17, a pending display or an active parts that can be displayed in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ with different jackpot expectations),
The specific light emitting means is capable of emitting light in a light emission mode corresponding to the display mode of the specific display regardless of whether or not the specific light emission effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, When the display pattern β or the display pattern γ is determined, the starting port lamp 135SG009S starts regardless of the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a winning flash effect or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, etc. (a portion that emits light in a color according to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ from the occurrence of a winning to the end of the variable display based on the starting winning);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific display can also be recognized by the light emission mode of the specific light emitting means provided around the specific area, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 47 is the gaming machine described in Form 46,
The number of light emitting modes in which the specific light emitting means can emit light is greater than the number of light emitting modes in which the first light emitting means can emit light in the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-9, (a part in which the number of light emitting modes of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S in the starting gate lamp light emission performance is greater than the number of light emitting modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash display);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emission variations of the specific light emitting means are increased, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 48 is the gaming machine according to Form 46 or Form 47,
The light emitting area of the first light emitting means is larger than the light emitting area of the specific light emitting means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-10, the light emitting area where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as a winning flash effect is , a portion provided larger than the light emitting area where the starting port lamp 135SG009S emits light as a lighting effect of the starting port lamp),
The period in which the specific light emitting means emits light according to the display mode of the specific display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition of No. 1 is such that the first light emitting means emits light according to the specific light emission effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. (If it is decided to execute both the winning flash effect and the pending display notice effect based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will emit light after the starting winning occurs.) While the starting gate lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the start winning flash effect, the start exit lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the reach effect of the variable display that is the target of the start win flash effect, while the variable display that is the target of the pending display notice effect after the start winning occurs. (the part that emits light until the end of the variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decline in game interest due to excessively long execution of light emission by the first light emitting means in accordance with the specific light emitting effect, and to prevent the light emitting mode of the specific light emitting means from becoming more advantageous. Players' expectations can be maintained for a long time.

The gaming machine of Form 49 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 46 to 48,
Both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means are capable of blinking light emission (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in the section where the starting port lamp 135SG009S can flash),
The flashing cycle of the first light emitting means is different from the flashing cycle of the specific light emitting means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-10, the flashing cycle of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S is set as a winning flash effect as a winning flash effect). Parts that differ from the flashing cycle of lamp 135SG009F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the blinking periods are different, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 135SG)
Next, the feature section 135SG (hereinafter abbreviated as main feature section 135SG) in the embodiment of this invention will be explained. FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 135SG. As shown in FIG. 11-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this feature section 135SG, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F imitating the character A is provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and a winning ball device 6A A starting port lamp 135SG009S for causing the winning ball device 6A (first starting port) to emit light is provided near the starting port.

Further, a stick lamp 135SG009X for causing the stick controller 31A to emit light is provided in the stick controller 31A, and a button lamp 135SG009Y for causing the push button 31B to emit light is provided in the push button 31B. These stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135Sg009Y, together with the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d, constitute the game effect lamp 9 in the main feature section 135SG.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the starting port lamp 135SG009S, the stick lamp 135SG09X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y are connected to the lamp control board 14, and are used for performance control via the lamp control board 14. It can be turned on (flashing) under control from the CPU 120.

FIG. 11-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the feature section 135SG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 in the feature section 135SG constitutes a first display area 135SG005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 includes a first reservation memory display area 135SG005D in which the number of reserved first special symbols can be displayed by the number of circular reservation displays, and a second reservation memory number of special symbols can be displayed by a circular reservation display. The second display area 135SG005Sa includes a second reserved storage display area 135SG005U that can be displayed according to the number of characters, and a telop display area 135SG005T that can display telops indicating the game status, the performance being executed, etc.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 has a fourth symbol 135SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, a display of the first special symbol pending memory number, and a display of the second special symbol pending memory number. 3 display area 135SG005Sb.

Among these, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the center of the first display area 135SG005F, and it is possible to perform variable display of decorative patterns. It has become. Moreover, a small pattern 135SG005M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F. The small patterns include the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the "right" decorative pattern display areas. The symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols displayed on 5R are vertically arranged. Moreover, the small pattern 135SG005M is a pattern that is not hidden during variable display and is always displayed within the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5.

In addition, in the main characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. It is arranged at the left end of the 1 display area 135SG005F in a smaller size than the decorative pattern. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 135SG005M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 135SG005A is provided at the lower center of the first display area 135SG005F in the main feature section 135SG for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display.

Hereinafter, in this feature section 135SG, the pending display and the active display may be collectively referred to as a specific display.

FIG. 11-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in the feature section 135SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 11-4(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command determines whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss", "big hit", or "small hit", as shown in Figure 11-4 (B), for example. Different EXT data is set depending on the result (predetermined result) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-4(B), command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variable. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or a small winning.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, different EXT data is set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10"), which will be described later. .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH and command C6XXH are production control commands (winning determination result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning determination result. Among these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or not, the jackpot type (probable variable or non-probable variable), and a small hit as the winning determination result. . In addition, the command C6XXH is a fluctuation category command that indicates whether the random value for fluctuation pattern determination is a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" fluctuation pattern as a winning determination result. It is.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 11-4(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or some of these commands may not be included. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 11-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 11-5, in this feature section 135SG, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and the random number MR4 for determining the display result of the ordinary figure are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting section 135SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special pattern in the special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " 997'' range.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display device 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 11-6(A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 135SG, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result into a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature section 135SG, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the special figure display result is treated as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot gaming state. This is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this feature section 135SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), there are more determination values than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 135SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 135SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that the control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability of winning, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Further, FIG. 11-6(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a "small win" game state as a "small win". This is the table referenced for this purpose.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this feature section 135SG, regardless of whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether to control the special figure display result to a "small hit" game state as a "small hit". This is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 135SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different depending on the first special figure game and the second special figure game. There is. Specifically, if it is a special game of the first special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but if it is a special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value has been assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the time saving control is executed so that the second starting winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In the high base state where winnings occur and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hits" almost never occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state where game balls are likely to enter a prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which a large number of game balls cannot be obtained, thereby preventing the game interest from decreasing.

FIG. 11-7(A) shows an example of the structure of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 135SG selects one of multiple jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which a variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A). 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 135SG using FIG. 11-7(B), in this feature section 135SG, high accuracy control and time saving control are set as jackpot types after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "Probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and move to a high-precision high base state, and a high-probability low base state in which high-precision control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. A "probable variable jackpot C" that transitions, and a "non-probable variable jackpot" that transitions to a low-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state where only the time saving control is executed are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . The jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds). . In addition, in the jackpot game state of "probable variable jackpot C" and "non-probable variable jackpot", rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds). It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. Sometimes called.

Although not particularly shown, the small winning game state in the feature section 135SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. It has become. Furthermore, after the small winning game ends, the gaming state immediately before the small winning game is carried over.

The high-precision control and time-saving control that are executed after the jackpot gaming state of variable probability jackpots are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the jackpot gaming state ends. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a variable probability jackpot, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state occurs continuously without going through the normal state. , resulting in a so-called consecutive housing situation.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature section 135SG), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 11-7(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special pattern game using the second special pattern, the jackpot type is not determined to be controlled to a normal open jackpot state or a high speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type as "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". Therefore, for example, by high opening control associated with time saving control, in a gaming state where game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, frequent occurrence of jackpot states with few prize balls obtained can be avoided. This makes it possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 11-7 (A), the assignment of the judgment value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is the same, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a fixed jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 11-8 shows a variation pattern in the main feature section 135SG. In this feature section 135SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, the normal reach variation pattern includes a normal reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect described below is not executed, and a normal reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect described below is executed once, and a common normal reach variation pattern. is now executed. Furthermore, the super reach variation pattern includes a super reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed twice, which will be described later, and a super reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect, which will be described later, is executed three times. The performance is now executed. In other words, although this feature section 135SG exemplifies a form in which only one type of reach effect is provided as a normal reach effect and a super reach effect, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a plurality of reach effects may be provided as normal reach effects and super reach effects.

Incidentally, the variation pattern in this feature section 135SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 11-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern is executed in the feature section 135SG is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, the normal reach variation pattern in this feature section 135SG includes a variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and variable-displayed again during a variable display, and a pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during a variable display. There is a variation pattern. In addition, in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is not performed during the variable display is set to have a shorter special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed once during the variable display.

Furthermore, regarding the super reach variation patterns in this feature section 135SG, there are a variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during a variable display, and a variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed three times during a variable display. In addition, in the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display is set to have a shorter special symbol variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed 3 times during the variable display. .

In addition, in this characteristic section 135SG, since the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

In other words, regarding the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern in this feature section 135SG, the greater the number of times the pseudo continuous performance is executed during the variable display, the higher the jackpot expectation level becomes.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, as will be described later, the types of these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as non-reach types, normal reach types, super reach types, etc. After that, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and from these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern. The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 11-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this characteristic section 135SG. In this feature section 135SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 1-time jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach pseudo-continuous performance 2-time jackpot), PB1-4 (super reach pseudo-continuous performance 2-time jackpot variation pattern) It is determined from the variable pattern of reach pseudo consecutive performance 3 times jackpot). In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table B to change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern), PB1 Determined from -2 (Normal reach pseudo consecutive performance 1 time jackpot variation pattern), PB1-3 (Normal reach pseudo continuous performance 2 time jackpot variation pattern), PB1-4 (Normal reach pseudo continuous performance 3 time jackpot variation pattern) .

As shown in FIG. 11-9, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B have different determination ratios for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, Determine PB1-4 at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 20%. 4 at a rate of 45%. In other words, in this feature section 135SG, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probability variable jackpot. Furthermore, when paying attention to the number of executions of pseudo-continuous performances, when the variable display result is a definite variable jackpot, more pseudo-continuous performances are more likely to be executed during the variable display than when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot. There is. Therefore, this feature section 135SG allows the player to pay attention to the variation pattern in the variable display and the number of executions of the pseudo continuous performance.

In addition, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special win fluctuation pattern determination table, and use the special win fluctuation pattern determination table to determine the fluctuation pattern as PC1-1 (special win fluctuation pattern). do.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss and select the corresponding Using fluctuation pattern determination table A for misses, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), and PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 1-time variation variation pattern). ), PA2-3 (variation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (variation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and Using fluctuation pattern determination table B, change the fluctuation patterns into PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach miss), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach miss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern with one miss of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance). ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern determination table B for the loss, and Using fluctuation pattern determination table B, change the fluctuation patterns into PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach miss), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach miss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern with one miss of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance). ), PA2-3 (variation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (variation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern determination table C for the loss, and Using fluctuation pattern determination table C, change the fluctuation patterns into PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach miss), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach miss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern with one miss of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance). ), PA2-3 (variation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (variation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. (time-saving shortening variation pattern with non-reach miss), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach miss), PA2-2 (variation pattern with 1 miss of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo-continuous performance 2 times) It is determined from PA2-4 (variation pattern of failure of 3 times of super reach pseudo consecutive performance).

In other words, when the variable display result in this feature section 135SG is "off", the special figure is displayed based on the fact that the number of pending memory of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or that the time is shortened. The rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1). This makes it possible to prevent the game from being delayed and shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

The RAM 102 in the feature section 135SG includes a game control data holding area 135SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The data holding area 135SG150 for game control shown in FIG. , a game control timer setting section 135SG153, a game control counter setting section 135SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 135SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started even though a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. , and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 135SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B indicates that although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, it has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage section 135SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern holding storage section 135SG151C stores the holding information of the normal pattern game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the standard figure reservation storage unit 135SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the standard figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for the purpose is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 135SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 135SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 135SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 135SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 135SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section 135SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 135SG190 as shown in FIG. 11-11(A), for example, as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. It is being The production control data holding area 135SG190 shown in FIG. 11-11(A) includes a production control flag setting section 135SG191, a production control timer setting section 135SG192, a production control counter setting section 135SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 135SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 135SG191 includes multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting unit 135SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting section 135SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the performance control timer setting section 135SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 135SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 135SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section 135SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting unit 135SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 135SG, data constituting a starting winning reception command buffer 135SG194A as shown in FIG. 11-11(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 135SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) is provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) is provided. When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 135SG194A are an area for storing these starting opening winning designation commands and a storage area for storing the symbol designating commands. Indicates the storage area, the area to store the variable category designation command, the area to store the pending storage number notification command, the area to store the pending display flag, and whether or not it is subject to the winning flash effect described later. A storage area (entry) is secured for storing the winning flash performance target flag and the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory in association with the number of pending memories. ing.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The content (data) of the pending memory for which the start condition has been met is copied to the active display buffer 135SG194B in FIG. 11-11(C), and the content of the copied pending memory itself is transferred from the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A. will be deleted. Then, the storage contents of storage areas lower than the deleted reserved storage are shifted one by one to the storage areas above.

As described above, when the variable display of the pending memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is started, the active display buffer 135SG194B stores the content of the pending memory (for which the start condition is satisfied). Since the data) is copied, as shown in FIG. 11-11(C), a storage area similar to the starting winning reception command buffer 135SG194A is provided. In other words, there is an area for storing the starting opening winning designation command, an area for storing the symbol designation command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the pending storage number notification command, and an area for storing the pending display flag. , and an area for storing a winning flash effect flag indicating whether or not the winning flash effect is to be performed, which will be described later.

In this feature section 135SG, if a starting winning occurs when variable display is not being executed and there is no pending memory, a starting opening winning designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a pending winning based on the starting winning, etc. The storage number notification command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B without passing through the reception command buffer 135SG194A at the time of starting winning. Incidentally, the suspension display flag is set by the performance control CPU 120 executing a prefetch notice setting process (S161) to be described later.

The storage contents of the active display buffer 135SG194B are cleared (deleted) in the special figure waiting process executed when the variable display ends.

Note that the pending display flag is a flag indicating a display mode of an active display corresponding to a pending display or a variable display in progress. Although the details will be described later, in this feature section 135SG, it is possible to suggest the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state by the display mode of these pending display and active display (value of the pending display flag).

Next, the starting prize winning determination process of the main feature section 135SG executed in step S101 in FIG. 6 will be explained based on FIGS. 11-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the state is the same (step 135 SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 135SGS101a; Y), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 135SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending memory number by reading the first pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending memory counter provided in the game control counter setting section 135SG154, for example. When the first special symbol pending storage number is not the upper limit value in step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 135SG155 is set to "1" ( Step 135SGS103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step 135SGS101a (step 135SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit value in step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; Y), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the on state ( Step 135SGS101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the on state (step 135SGS101b; Y), the number of second special figure pending memories, which is the number of pending memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 135 SGS105). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 135SG154, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 135SGS105 (step 135SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 135SG155 is set to "2" ( Step 135SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of step 135SGS103 and step 135SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 135SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated by adding 1 (step 135SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 135SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step 135SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154. Numerical data indicating a random number MR2 for use and a random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern are extracted (step 135SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the beginning of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage section according to the starting opening buffer value (step 135SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage section 135SG151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage section 135SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step 135SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step 135SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value is performed (step 135SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the performance control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

Following the process of step 135SGS111, winning random value determination process is executed (step 135SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending memory number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. Settings are made for this purpose (step 135 SGS 113). The pending storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 135SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS115), and then the process of step 135SGS104 is started. move on. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step 135SGS114; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS116), and then the starting winning prize is Finish the process. Thereby, even if both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting winning of a game ball, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 11-13(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS112 of FIG. 11-12 as the winning random value determination process. In this feature section 135SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 6) is performed to treat the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbol) as a "jackpot". A determination is made as to whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state. In addition, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 6), a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined.

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning random value determination process of step 135SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol is determined to be stopped and displayed as a special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach is determined. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is determined whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a "jackpot" or which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on this determination result, the performance control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-read preview effect is executed.

In the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 11-13(A), the CPU 103 first checks the status of the time saving flag and probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting section 135SG152, etc. The current gaming state in machine 1 is specified (step 135SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability state is in the variable probability state when the variable probability flag is in the on state, and specifies that the state is in the reduced time state when the variable variable probability flag is in the off state and the time saving flag is in the on state, and when both the variable variable flag and the time saving flag are in the state When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 135SGS121, special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 11-6 is selected and set (step 135SGS122). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 135SGS109 of FIG. 11-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 135SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot" in the special figure display result judgment table 1 selected by the process of step 135SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 uses the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to determine the presence or absence of a judgment value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 135SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there is no jackpot in the variable display (step 135SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-6 2 is selected and set (step 135 SGS124). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 135SGS109 of FIG. 11-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 135SGS125).

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a small hit in the variable display (step 135SGS125; Y), the variable display result will be a "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the 6th symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command according to the result (step 135SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 135SGS127), and proceed to step 135SGS138. .

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit judgment range, that is, if the variable display result is a "miss" in the variable display, a symbol will be displayed according to the variable display result being a "miss". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command, is executed (step 135SGS128), and it is determined whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (step 135SGS128). 135SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 135SGS129; N), select and set the variation pattern determination table A for failure, and if the time saving flag is on (step 135SGS129; Y), determine the variation pattern for failure. Table D is selected and set (step 135SGS131). Note that the failure variation pattern determination table A is a failure variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. Further, the loss variation pattern determination table D is a loss variation pattern determination table that is used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is being executed.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, in addition to these fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss and fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss, there is also a fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss, which is used when the number of pending memories is three. , an error variation pattern determination table C is prepared in advance to be used when the number of pending memories is 4, but as shown in FIG. 11-9, among these error variation pattern determination tables A to C. , In the variation pattern judgment table A for a loss, 600 judgment values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern judgment can take. In the fluctuation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern among the possible ranges of the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, and the fluctuation pattern determination table for outliers is assigned. In C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern out of the possible range of the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for losing, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach fluctuation pattern out of the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take. .

For this reason, by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure in step 135SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always determined as non-reach or super reach even if the number of retained memories changes after the determination. Since this is a fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern determination table A for losing is used to determine the starting winning time.

In addition, if it is determined in step 135SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a jackpot during variable display (step 135SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 11-13 (A), , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 135 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , selects table data for jackpot type determination from table data configuring the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be determined.

In addition, the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot B, and the third symbol specification command if it is a probability variable jackpot C. executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the 5th symbol designation command (step 135 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot. (Step 135 SGS134). If the determined jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (step 135SGS134; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 135SGS135), and step Proceed to 135SGS138.

Further, when the determined jackpot type is a variable probability jackpot (step 135SGS134; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set (step 135SGS136), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS138.

After executing any of the processes in step 135SGS127, step 135SGS130, step 135SGS131, step 135SGS135, and step 135SGS136, each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and a numerical value indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are Using the data, a fluctuation category is determined according to the range of determination values including the random value MR3 (step 135 SGS138). In this feature section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 11-13(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is "non-reach" regardless of the total number of pending memories. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "Super Reach", a variable category of "Other" that is a variable display mode other than "Non-reach" and "Super Reach" (for example, normal reach), It is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined based on the random value MR3.

Thereafter, a setting is made to transmit a variable category designation command according to the determination result of the process of step 135SGS138 to the production control board 12 (step 135SGS139), and then the winning random number value determination process is ended.

FIGS. 11-14 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 8 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 11-14, the production control CPU 120 first confirms the storage contents of the production control command reception buffer and receives the reception from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. It is determined whether there is a command (step 135 SGS 221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 135SGS221; N), the command analysis process ends.

If there is a received command in step 135SGS221 (step 135SGS221; Y), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first starting opening prize designation command, for example by checking the MODE data of the received command. (Step 135 SGS222).

If the received command is not the first starting slot winning designation command at step 135SGS222 (step 135SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second starting slot winning designation command (step 135SGS224).

If the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command at step 135SGS224 (step 135SGS224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command (step 135SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command at step 135SGS226 (step 135SGS226; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step 135SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command in step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS228).

If the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command at step 135SGS228 (step 135SGS228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS230).

If the received command in step 135SGS222 is the first starting gate winning designation command (step 135SGS222; Y), or if the received command in step 135SGS224 is the second starting gate winning designation command (step 135SGS224; Y), in step 135SGS226 If the received command is a symbol designation command (step 135SGS226; Y), if the received command is a variable category command in step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; Y), then in step 135SGS228, the received command is the first pending storage number notification command. (135SGS228; Y), and in step 135SGS230, if the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS230; Y), the received command is transferred to the starting prize receiving command buffer 135SG194A shown in FIG. 11-11. It is stored at the beginning of the free area in the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS233), and the process returns to step 135SGS221.

Specifically, in step 135SGS233, if there is no pending memory and variable display is not being executed, the received command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B, and if there is pending memory or variable display is not being executed, the received command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B. , the received command may be stored at the beginning of the free area in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A.

In addition, if a pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) is received together with a variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command), , the pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A. That is, it is only necessary to sequentially store the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of a starting prize winning from the beginning of the empty area in the starting winning receiving command buffer 135SG194A.

If the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command in step 135SGS230 (step 135SGS230; N), settings are made in accordance with other received commands (step 135SGS234), and the process returns to step 135SGS221.

In addition, in the command analysis process of this feature section 135SG, if the received command is any one of the starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category command, and pending storage number notification command, the received command is used at the starting winning time. Although the embodiment has been illustrated in which the received command buffer 135SG194A is stored sequentially from the beginning of the free area, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the received command is the 1st starting opening prize designation command, it is stored as the pending storage number notification command. If a timer is set to wait for the reception of the number of pending memories, and if no pending memory number notification command is received before the timer times out, the pending memory of the entry that has not received the number of pending memory notification commands will be processed as described below. It may be set to be excluded from the reading preview performance.

Next, the production control process processing in the feature section 135SG will be explained. As shown in FIG. 11-15, in the production control process processing, the production control CPU 120 executes the prefetch notice setting process (step S161), and then displays the active display area 135SG005A, the first pending storage display area 135SG005D, and the second pending display area 135SG005A. A specific display start effect execution process (step 135SGS162) is executed to execute a specific display start effect as a display start animation of the pending display in the storage display area 135SG005U and a display start animation of the active display in the active display area 135SG005A. Further, after the specific display start performance execution process, the performance control CPU 120 performs a winning flash performance execution process (step 135SGS163) to execute a winning flash performance, and a pending display after the above-mentioned specific display start performance has ended. A specific display for executing a specific display rotation display effect (see Figures 11-19 (B-1) to Figure 11-19 (B-4)) as a rotation animation according to the value of the display mode flag of the active display. In the rotating display performance execution process (step 135SGS164), when it is decided to execute the suspended display preview performance as a pre-read preview in the feature section 135SG, the variable display based on the suspended memory that is the target of the suspended display preview performance ends. Until then, a starting exit lamp lighting performance execution process (step 135SG165) is executed to execute a starting exit lamp lighting performance that causes the starting exit lamp 135SG009S to emit light in a color corresponding to the display mode of the hold display/active display based on the hold memory. Then, any one of steps S170 to S177 is executed.

Note that the specific display rotating display effect execution processing in this feature section 135SG includes processing for shifting each pending display to the next display position and displaying it as a rotating animation based on the start of the variable display, and processing for displaying the pending display as an active display. It also includes processing for shifting to the display area 135SG005A and displaying it as a rotating animation.

FIG. 11-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 161 of FIG. 11-15 as the prefetch notice setting process. In the prefetch notice setting process, the production control CPU 120 first checks the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A or the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS240), and determines whether there is an entry for which the display mode flag is not set. Determination is made (step 135SGS241). If there is no entry for which the display mode flag is set (Step 135SGS241; N), the prefetch notice setting process ends; if there is an entry for which the display mode flag is not set (Step 135SGS241; Y), the prefetch notice setting process is already displayed. It is determined whether there is an entry whose mode flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the pending display preview effect as a pre-read preview effect is already being executed (step 135 SGS242). .

If there is no entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS242; N), it is further determined whether the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small hit (step 135SGS243). If the symbol designation command of the entry does not indicate a small hit (Step 135SGS243; N), the variable display result is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (Step 135SGS244a), and the variable category is specified from the fluctuation category command of the entry. (Step 135SGS244b). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pending display preview effect and the display pattern based on the specified variable display result and variable category (step 135SGS245).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-17, if the variable display result is off and the variable category is non-reach, there is a 95% chance that the pending display preview performance will not be executed (pending display or active display). The display mode is decided to be the display pattern α) which is white, and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect at a rate of 5% using the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or active display is blue), and 0% It is decided to execute the hold display preview performance in the display pattern γ (the display mode of hold display or active display is red) at a ratio of .

In addition, if the variable display result is a failure and the variable category is other (normal reach), 80% of the time the pending display notice effect will not be executed (the display pattern α in which the display mode of the pending display or active display is white) ), it is decided to execute the pending display preview effect at a rate of 20% in the display pattern β (the display mode of pending display or active display is blue), and the display pattern to display the pending display notice effect at a rate of 0%. It is decided to execute the process in γ (the display mode of pending display or active display is red).

In addition, if the variable display result is a failure and the variable category is super reach, 65% of the time the pending display notice effect will not be executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of the pending display or active display is white). It was decided to execute the pending display preview effect at a rate of 25% in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or active display is blue), and at a rate of 10%, the pending display preview effect was executed in the display pattern γ ( It is decided to execute the display mode of the pending display or active display in red).

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided that the pending display preview effect will not be executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of the pending display or active display is white) at a rate of 15%, and at a rate of 30%. It has been decided to execute the pending display preview effect in display pattern β (display mode of pending display or active display is blue), and the pending display preview effect is executed in display pattern γ (display mode of pending display or active display) at a rate of 55%. (in red).

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, when the pending display and active display are displayed in red, the probability that the target variable display result will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation) is highest, and when the pending display and active display are displayed in white. It is set so that the probability of the target variable display result being a loss is highest when the result is the highest (Jackpot expectation level according to the display color of the pending display or active display: red > blue > white).

Returning to FIG. 11-16, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the pending display preview performance in step 135SGS245 (step 135SGS246). If it is decided in step 135SGS245 to execute the pending display preview effect (step 135SGS246; Y), a value (“1” or “2”) corresponding to the determined display pattern is set in the display mode flag of the entry ( Step 135SGS247), the prefetch notice setting process ends.

In addition, if there is an entry whose display mode flag is already set to "1" or "2" (Step 135SGS242; Y), if the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small hit (Step 135SGS243; Y) If it is decided not to execute the pending display preview effect (step 135SGS246; N), set the display mode flag of the entry to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the ``drill'' display preview effect (step 135SGS248); The prefetch notice setting process ends.

In addition, this feature section 135SG exemplifies a form that can be executed as a pending display preview performance by combining a prefetch preview performance that determines the display format of the pending display and a performance that determines the display format of the active display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to separately execute the pre-read preview effect that determines the display mode of the pending display and the effect that determines the display mode of the active display as different effects. good.

FIG. 11-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS162 of FIG. 11-15 as the specific display start effect execution process. In the specific display start effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether either the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is being executed (step 135SGS251). In addition, whether specific display start effect A or specific display start effect B is being executed depends on whether the process timer for specific display start effect A or the process timer for specific display start effect B, which will be described later, is in operation. The judgment can be made depending on whether

If specific display start effect A or specific display start effect B is not being executed (step 135SGS251; N), check whether a start win designation command is received (whether the start win designation command reception flag is set or not) is determined (step 135SGS252). If the start winning designation command is not received (step 135SGS252; N), the specific display start performance execution process is ended. In addition, if a starting winning designation command has been received (step 135SGS252; Y), a newly generated pending memory entry is identified by referring to the starting winning receiving command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B ( 263SGS273), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is reserved (step 135SGS253a). It should be noted that whether or not it is the first special figure pending storage may be determined based on the starting opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry (identified entry) is not the first special figure pending memory (step 135SGS253a; N), the process advances to step 135SGS255, and if the entry is the first special figure pending memory (step 135SGS253a; Y), the specified entry is It is determined whether the display mode flag of the entered entry is 0, that is, whether or not the entry is subject to the pending display preview performance (step 135SGS254). If the display mode flag of the specified entry is 0, that is, if the entry is not the target of the pending display preview performance (step 135SGS254; Y), the process advances to step 135SGS255.

In the process of step 135SGS255, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table for specific display start effect A according to the display position of the specific display (pending display or active display). Then, a process timer for specific display start effect A is started (step 135SGS256).

In addition, if the display mode flag of the specified entry is not 0, that is, if the entry is the target of the pending display preview effect (step 135SGS254; N), the display position of the specific display (pending display or active display) The corresponding process table for specific display start effect B is selected (step 135SGS257). Then, a process timer for specific display start performance B is started (step 135SGS258).

After executing step 135SGS256 or step 135SGS258, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device according to the contents of process data 1 of the set specific display start effect process table (step 135SGS259), and ends the specific display start effect execution process. .

Further, when the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is being executed (step 135SGS251; Y), the effect control CPU 120 uses the process timer for the specific display start effect that is being executed (the process for the specific display start effect A). The value of the timer or the process timer for specific display start effect B) is reduced by 1 (step 135 SGS260), and the process timer for the specific display start effect that has been reduced by 1 (the process timer for the specific display start effect that is currently being executed) times out. It is determined whether or not it has been done (step 135SGS261). If the process timer for specific display start effect that is being executed does not time out (step 135SGS261; N), the effect device is controlled in accordance with the process data of the process timer for specific display start effect that is being executed (step 135SGS262), the specific display start effect execution process ends.

In addition, if the process timer for specific display start effect that is being executed times out (step 135SGS261; Y), it is determined whether the process timer for specific display start effect is the last process timer for specific display start effect. (Step 135SGS263). When the last specific display start effect process timer times out (step 135SGS263; Y), the specific display start effect is ended (step 135SGS267), and the specific display start effect execution process is ended. If the process timer for the last specific display start effect has not timed out (step 135SGS263; N), the process data is switched, the process timer for the next specific display start effect is started, and the next specific display start effect is started. The production device is controlled according to the content corresponding to the process data of the process timer (step 135SGS264, step 135SGS265, step 135SGS266), and the specific display start production execution process is ended.

As described above, in this feature section 135SG, if a starting prize occurs and it is decided not to perform a pre-read preview performance (pending display preview performance) based on the starting winning, or if the starting winning occurs in the second In the case of a starting prize in the starting opening, as shown in Figure 11-19 (A), Figure 11-19 (B), Figure 11-19 (B-1) to Figure 11-19 (B-4). , at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the active display area 135SG005A or the pending memory display areas 135SG005D, 135SG005U, an appearance animation in which a pending display (active display) gradually appears from the bottom to the top is displayed as specific display start effect A. .

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, the period from the occurrence of a starting prize to the end of the appearance animation of the pending display (active display) as the specific display start effect A is about 0.2 seconds. Then, the pending display (active display) after the end of the specific display start effect A is as the above-mentioned specific display rotation display effect in the active display area 135SG005A or the pending memory display area 135SG005D, 135SG005U, like other pending displays and active displays. Shift to display with rotation animation.

In addition, if a starting prize has occurred, and it has been decided to execute a pre-read notice performance (pending display notice performance) based on the starting prize, and the starting prize is a starting prize in the first starting gate, As shown in Figures 11-20(A) to 11-20(C) and Figures 11-20(C-1) to 11-20(C-4), as specific display start effect B, first, An animation in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the display device 5. After the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the variable display is executed at the timing of the start winning, or if the first special figure pending memory already exists, the character A An animation of moving to the 1 pending storage display area 135SG005D is displayed. At this time, the character A is displayed overlapping a part of the active display area 135SG005A in the process of moving to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D.

Then, when the character A moves to the first reservation storage display area 135SG005D, as shown in FIGS. 11-20 (C-1) to 11-20 (C-4), the character A An animation that attacks (acts on) the position where the hold display is displayed is displayed. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which a hold display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In this feature section 135SG, the period from the occurrence of a starting prize to the end of the animation in which the character A attacks the position where the pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed as the specific display start effect B is approximately 1 second, and the period from the end of the animation to the end of the appearance animation of the suspended display is approximately 0.2 seconds. In other words, when performing specific display start effect B targeting the pending display of the first special symbol, it takes 1.2 seconds from the time a starting prize occurs until the display of the pending display based on the starting prize is completed. . Then, the hold display after the end of the specific display start performance B transitions to a rotating animation display in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D as the above-mentioned specific display rotation display performance, similar to other hold displays and active displays.

In addition, when the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the specific display start effect B, if the variable display is not executed at the timing of the start winning and the first special figure pending memory does not exist. , an animation in which character A moves to active display area 135SG005A is displayed. Then, when the character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A, the active display is displayed based on the starting prize, as in Figures 11-20 (C-1) to 11-20 (C-4). An animation of attacking (acting) on the active display area 135SG005A is displayed. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In this feature section 135SG, the period from the occurrence of a starting prize to the end of the animation in which character A attacks the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display start effect B is about 0.5 seconds, and the period of time is approximately 0.5 seconds, The period from when the active display appearance animation ends is about 0.2 seconds. In other words, when performing the specific display start performance B targeting the active display, it takes 0.7 seconds from the occurrence of a starting prize to the completion of the display of the active display based on the starting winning. Then, the active display after the end of the specific display start effect B shifts to a rotating animation display in the active display area 135SG005A as the above-described specific display rotating display effect.

11-21 and 11-22 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS163 of FIG. 11-21 as the winning flash effect execution process. In the winning flash performance execution process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the starting winning receiving command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS272), and displays the starting winning receiving command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B. It is determined whether there is an entry whose mode flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the pending display preview effect is being executed (step 135SGS273).

If there is an entry in which the display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS273; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the entry is based on a winning start at the first starting opening. It is determined whether or not (step 135SGS274). It should be noted that whether or not the entry is based on a starting prize in the first starting hole may be determined from the starting hole winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry is an entry based on a starting prize into the first starting opening (step 135SGS274; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the gaming state is the normal state or not (step 135SGS275). If the gaming state is the normal state (step 135SGS275; Y), it is further determined whether the value of the production control process flag is between 0 and 3, that is, whether the gaming state is the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. It is determined whether or not (step 135SGS276). If the value of the production control process flag is one of 0 to 3 (step 135SGS276; Y), the fluctuation category of the entry (the entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2") is super. It is determined whether it is reach (step 135SGS277).

If the variable category of the entry is super reach (step 135SGS277; Y), it is determined whether the value of the production control process flag is 2, that is, whether variable display is being executed (step 135SGS278). When the value of the performance control process flag is 2 (step 135SGS278; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ready-to-win performance is being executed (step 135SGS279). It should be noted that whether or not the ready-to-win effect is being executed may be determined based on the contents of the variable display process data.

If the value of the performance control process flag is not 2 (step 135SGS278; N) or if the reach performance is not being executed (step 135SGS279; N), the performance control CPU 120 executes the winning flash performance based on the variable display result.・Determine non-execution. Incidentally, the variable display result may be specified from the symbol designation command of the entry for which the winning flash effect flag is not set.

As shown in FIG. 11-24, if the variable display result is a loss, execution of the flash effect upon winning is determined at a rate of 10%, and non-execution of the flash effect upon winning is determined at a rate of 90%. In addition, when the variable display result is a jackpot, execution of the flash effect upon winning is determined at a rate of 20%, and non-execution of the flash effect upon winning is determined at a rate of 80%.

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, when the winning flash effect is executed from the start winning time, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is set higher than when the winning flash effect is not executed.

Returning to FIG. 11-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the winning flash effect (step 135SG279b). If it has been decided to execute the winning flash effect (Step 135SG279b; Y), the winning flash effect flag of the entry (the entry for which the winning flash effect flag is not set) is set as the target of the winning flash effect. is set to "1" indicating that it is a pending memory (step 135SG280), and the winning flash effect execution flag is turned on (step 135SG280a). The process table for the flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period is selected, the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period is started, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data 1 (steps 135SGS281 to 135SGS283), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

As shown in Figure 11-23, the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period is the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period for 1.5 seconds from the occurrence of the start winning by the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning the prize and the game effect lamp 9. (As shown in FIGS. 11-26(A) and 11-26(B), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are lit at high brightness C1. This is a performance that causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output a sound corresponding to the winning flash performance at a volume V1, and displays the effect image 135SG005E of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5. In addition, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect in this feature section 135SG is the sound corresponding to the first winning flash effect that is output during the execution of the first winning flash effect, and the second winning flash effect that is output during the execution of the second winning flash effect. When the flash is produced, it is divided into corresponding sound and sound. Among these, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, a sound having a relatively short output period (for example, 1 second), such as an electronic sound or the voice sound of a specific character, may be output once. Further, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the later period, it is sufficient to repeatedly output a sound having a longer output period than the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the earlier period, such as dedicated BGM or SE (sound effect). In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 135SG, in addition to the above-mentioned sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, a plurality of effect sounds such as the sound corresponding to the preview effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display, which will be described later, are generated in different ways using different channels. Simultaneous output from speakers 8L and 8R is possible depending on the volume.

In addition, if the entry is an entry based on winning the second starting slot (step 135SG274; N), and if the gaming state is not the normal state (step 135SG275; N), the performance control process flag is either 0 to 3. If not (Step 135SG276; N), if the variable category of the entry is not Super Reach (Step 135SG277; N), if the reach effect is being executed (Step 135SG279; Y), do not execute the flash effect when winning a prize. If it is determined (Step 135SG279b), the winning flash performance target flag of the entry is set to "0" indicating that it is not eligible for the winning flash performance (Step 135SG279c), and the winning flash performance execution process is executed. finish.

In addition, when the winning flash effect execution flag is on in step 135SGS271 (step 135SGS271; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process timer for the previous winning flash effect is in operation (step 135SGS271; Y). 135SGS284). If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period is operating (Step 135SGS284; Y), the value of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period is -1 (Step 135SGS285), and the value of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period is decreased by 1, and then the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period is activated. It is determined whether the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning has timed out (step 135SGS286). If the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period has not timed out (step 135SGS286; N), the performance control CPU 120 operates the performance device according to the process data of the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period which is being executed. control (step 135SGS287), and proceeds to step 135SGS292.

Further, when the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period has timed out (step 135SGS286; Y), it is determined whether the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the last period winning has timed out (step 135SGS288). If the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the last previous period has not timed out (step 135SGS288; N), the performance control CPU 120 switches the process data and starts the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the next previous period. Then, the production device is controlled in accordance with the process data of the process timer for flash production at the time of winning the next first period (step 135SGS289, step 135SGS290, step 135SGS291), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

Then, in step 135SGS292, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. is controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period. In addition, a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (step 135SGS293), and the winning flash effect execution process is ended. In addition, as a mode corresponding to the first-term winning flash performance, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be repeatedly emitted in white or red. In addition, the modes corresponding to the flash effect when winning are the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and stick lamp 135SG009Y, and the flash when winning. It is sufficient to cause the lamp 135SG009F to emit light in the same color.

Further, in step 135SGS288, when the process timer for the last first-term winning flash effect times out (step 135SGS288; Y), the performance control CPU 120 ends the first-term winning flash effect (step 135SGS294). Then, the process table for the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half is selected, the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half is started, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data 1 (steps 135SGS294 to 135SGS297), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

As shown in Figure 11-23, the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half is the period from the end of the flash performance at the time of winning in the first half to the start timing of the reach performance of the target variable display super reach, as shown in Figure 11-23. A silhouette image of the character A imitated by the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the image display device 5 by blinking in a manner corresponding to the winning flash effect and outputting a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V1. This is an effect that displays 135SG005S. As an aspect corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F may repeatedly emit light in white or red, as in the flash effect at the time of winning in the first half. In addition, since the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the second period is performed at a lower brightness than the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the first period (see Figure 11-28), the light emitting mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F for the actual winning flash in the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the second period is as follows. The light will be emitted in a darker color than the flash effect during the previous period.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-27(A), the game effect lamp 9 (particularly the frame lamp 9b) has a brightness C2, which is lower than the brightness C1 described above, during the period excluding the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period. The light turns on and off (flashing) repeatedly. In particular, the blinking cycle at brightness C2 is longer than the blinking cycle when the flash effect is executed at the time of winning in the previous period, and during the blinking, the blinking cycle is as shown in FIGS. 11-27(B) to 11-27(D). Thus, the frame lamp 9b is configured to blink while changing the emitted light color in stages at a plurality of locations in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. For this reason, the game effect lamp 9 during a period other than the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period has a lower impression on the player than the game effect lamp 9 during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period.

In addition, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period is not operating in step 135SGS284, that is, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period is in operation (step 135SGS284; N), the CPU 120 for controlling the effect The value of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning is -1 (step 135SGS298), and it is determined whether the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the latter half of the win, which has been decremented by 1, has timed out (step 135SGS299). If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of late prize winning has not timed out (step 135SGS299; N), the effect device is controlled according to the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of late prize winning which is being executed (step 135SGS300). ), proceed to step 135 SGS307.

Then, when the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period has timed out (step 135SGS299; Y), it is determined whether the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the last winning event in the latter period has timed out (step 135SGS301). If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the last latter period has not timed out (step 135SGS301; N), the process data is switched, the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the next latter period is started, and the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the next latter period is started. The production device is controlled according to the content (steps 135SGS302 to 135SGS304), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

In addition, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the last late winning time has timed out (step 135 SGS301; Y), the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the first late winning time is started, and the effect device is controlled according to the contents of process data 1 ( Step 135SGS305, step 135SGS306) and step 135SGS307 are proceeded to.

In step 135SGS307, the performance control CPU 120 controls the winning flash lamp 135SG009F to blink in a manner corresponding to the late winning flash performance. In addition, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1 (step 135SGS308).

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 checks the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS309), and determines whether the winning flash performance target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "1", that is, the variable display being executed. It is determined whether or not is a variable display subject to a flash effect when winning a prize (step 135SGS310). When the winning flash performance target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "0" (step 135SGS310; N), the winning flash performance execution process is ended. If the winning flash performance target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "1" (step 135SGS310; Y), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ready-to-win performance (step 135SGS311).

If it is the start timing of the reach effect (step 135SGS311; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, turns off the flash effect in progress at the time of winning (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), The flash effect execution process ends.

Moreover, when it is not the start timing of the ready-to-win effect (step 135SGS311; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a symbol confirmation command is received (step 135SGS311a). If the symbol confirmation command is received (Step 135SGS311a; Y), the flash effect at the time of winning is ended in the second half, the flag in which the flash effect is being executed at the time of winning is turned off (Step 135SGS312, Step 135SGS313), and the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. finish. If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step 135SGS311a; N), the winning flash effect execution process is ended without executing the processes of step 135SGS312 and step 135SGS313.

As described above, the first period winning flash performance in this feature section 135SG is a performance that ends when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed, while the second period winning flash performance is a performance This is a performance that is repeatedly executed without ending every time a certain period of time elapses until the start timing of the reach performance of the variable display of the target.

In addition, if the performance control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win performance of the variable display of the performance target during the execution of the flash performance at the time of late winning, due to the generation of static electricity, etc., the start timing of the said ready-to-win performance At the end timing of the variable display (timing at which the symbol confirmation command is received), which is a later timing, it is possible to end the flash effect at the time of winning a second time including the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning anew.

In addition, as shown in step 135SGS281 in FIG. 11-21 and step 135SGS295 in FIG. 11-22, in this feature section 135SG, the performance control CPU 120 uses a process table for performance 1 as a process table for flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period. , and select the production process table 1 as the process table for flash production at the time of winning in the second half. In other words, the performance pattern (performance period) of the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period and the flash performance at the time of winning in the second period of this feature section 135SG is always the same in the same manner and for the same performance period, regardless of the number of retained memories etc. A flash effect and a flash effect when winning a prize in the latter half are executed.

FIG. 11-25 is a flowchart showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process process. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 decreases each value of the process timer, variable time timer, and variable control timer by 1 (step 135SGS351, step 135SGS352, step 135SGS353). Note that the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are timers that are set in the variable display start setting process.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356). If the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356; Y), the process data is switched (step 135SGS357). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table set in the variable display start setting process to the process timer (step 135SGS358). Further, the control state for the production device (production component) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. set next (step 135SGS359). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out (step 135SGS356; N), the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) The performance device (performance component) is controlled according to the following (step 135SGS360).

In particular, as the control contents of steps 135SGS359 and 135SGS360, the production control CPU 120 outputs variable display compatible sound corresponding to the variable display being executed from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2 smaller than the volume V1 (step 135SGS361). Note that the variable display compatible sound in the feature section 135SG refers to BGM that corresponds to the background image displayed on the image display device 5, BGM that corresponds to the number of pseudo-sequential performances performed during variable display, and the like. In addition, when the flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period is not executed (step 135SGS362; N), the flashing control is performed in a manner according to the variable display being executed on the game effect lamp 9 (step 135SGS363), while the flash at the time of winning in the previous period While the performance is being executed (step 135SGS362; Y), the game effect lamp 9 is not controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed (as shown in FIGS. 11-21 and 11-22, the game effect lamp 9 is The lamp 9 is controlled to flash in a manner corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a preview performance execution process (step 135SG364). In the preview performance execution process, for example, at the time when the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display start setting process, it is determined whether or not to execute the preview performance during execution of the variable display, and in which performance pattern the preview performance is executed. It is only necessary to decide in advance whether or not the event will be announced, and to be able to execute the preview performance according to the result of the determination. In addition, when determining the performance pattern of the preview performance in the variable display start setting process described above, one performance pattern is determined from a plurality of performance patterns at different ratios depending on the variable display result, so that the preview performance is The rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled may be made different depending on whether the performance pattern is executed.

The performance executed as a preview performance in the feature section 135SG is a dialogue preview performance in which characters' lines are displayed on the image display device 5, and the jackpot expectation level varies depending on the displayed lines.

Further, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365; Y), the production control CPU 120 displays the next display screen of the left-center right decorative symbol (displayed after 30 ms have elapsed from the previous display switching point of the decorative symbol). The image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written into a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 135SGS366). In this way, variable display control of decorative patterns is realized in the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 sends to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this way, the background image, character image, and decorative pattern in the variable display of decorative patterns are displayed on the image display device 5. Also, the variable display control timer is reset to a predetermined value (step 135SGS367).

Further, if the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 135SGS365; N) or after executing step 135SGS366, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 135SGS368). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation command has been received is set (step 135SGS369; Y), the value of the production control process flag is changed to special symbol hit waiting processing. (Step S173) is updated to a value corresponding to (Step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if a pattern confirmation command is received, the control will shift to stopping the variable display, so for example, a variation pattern designation command that indicates a long variation time due to noise between boards, etc. Even in such a case, when the regular variable display time has elapsed (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol), the variable display of the decorative symbol can be ended.

Incidentally, process data during variable display of the decorative pattern is set in the process table used for variable display control of the decorative pattern. In other words, the sum of the process timer setting values of process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n times out in the process of step 135SGS356, there is no process data to be switched (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.), and the effect control of the decorative pattern based on the process table is finish.

Next, the operation mode of each production device when executing the winning flash production in the feature section 135SG will be explained based on FIGS. 11-28 to 11-68. First, FIG. 11-28 is a timing chart in the case where a starting winning occurs during execution of the variable display, and it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the starting winning. Furthermore, Figure 11-28 shows both the case where the execution of the winning flash effect is decided based on the starting winning and the execution of the pending display notice effect is also decided, and the case where the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is decided. It is a corresponding timing chart. FIGS. 11-29 to 11-48 show the image display device 5 when a starting winning occurs during execution of the variable display, and based on the starting winning, it is decided to execute the pending display preview effect and the winning flash effect. It is a diagram showing an effect mode in the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. Figures 11-49 to 11-68 show that a starting winning occurs while the variable display is being executed, and based on the starting winning, it is decided to execute the winning flash effect, while it is decided not to execute the pending display preview effect. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the image display device 5 and the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of a prize win.

In addition, in "When it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect" shown in Figures 11-29 to 11-48, the display mode of the pending display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is display pattern β or This is a case where the display pattern γ is displayed (displayed as a blue or red circle), and as shown in Figures 11-49 to 11-68, "While the execution of the winning flash effect has been decided, the pending display notice "When it is decided not to perform the performance" refers to the case where the display mode of the pending display that is the object of the flash performance at the time of winning is displayed in the display pattern α (displayed in a white circle).

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 and 11-29 (A), while the variable display is being executed, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of decorative patterns, and the speakers 8L and 8R output the variable display. The corresponding sound is output at volume V2. In addition, while the variable display is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks at a cycle T0 according to the variable display (Figures 11-27 (A) to 11-27 (Blinking in the manner shown in (D)) is controlled.

Furthermore, while the variable display is being executed, an image corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the preview performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R are displaying the image of the preview performance. A sound corresponding to the performance pattern (for example, a sound corresponding to a preview performance such as a sound of a character speaking the characters displayed on the image display device 5) is output at a volume V2. Further, as the pending memory, there are three first special figure pending memories (three pending displays are displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D).

If a prize is won in the first starting slot (starting prize) during such a variable display, and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the figure As shown in FIG. 11-28 and FIG. 11-29 (B), a flash effect is started at the time of first-term winning.

First, as shown in Figures 11-28 and 11-29 (B), the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume of V1 (V1>V2) for the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, 11-30(C), and 11-30(D), the display of the effect image 135SG005E starts from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG009X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the cycle T1. In the blinking control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

In addition, when the first period winning flash effect is started, as shown in Figure 11-30 (D), Figure 11-31 (E), and Figure 11-31 (F), as the above-mentioned specific display start effect B, An animation in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is blink-controlled, is displayed, and an animation in which the character A moves to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D is displayed. After the character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed (if it is the main characteristic part 135SG, the fourth pending display is displayed). An animation that attacks (acts on) the position where the display is displayed is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending storage display area 135SG005D, the pending display that is the target of the winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) that is currently being executed appears gradually from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A acted. An appearance animation is displayed (see Figures 11-20 (D-1) to 11-20 (D-5)). Note that the pending display whose appearance animation has been completed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display as a specific display rotating display effect like other pending displays.

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, if a starting winning occurs during the variable display and it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the display will be performed before the display of the pending display based on the starting winning is completed. At this time, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. In addition, the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect B in the feature section 135SG is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period (Figures 11-32 (G) and 11-32). 32(H)).

When the first-term winning flash performance ends, the second-term winning flash performance starts from the ending timing. As for the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half, as shown in Figures 11-28, 11-32 (G) and 11-32 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning from speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T2 (period T2>period T1). Furthermore, display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

In addition, at the end timing of the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period and the start timing of the flash performance at the time of winning in the second period, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The light emitting mode (blinking at brightness C1 and cycle T1) of the attacker lamp 9c and movable lamp 9d) corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period ends. The light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y corresponds to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. The display switches to the corresponding mode (blinking at brightness C2 and period T0 shown in FIGS. 11-27(A) to 11-27(D)). In other words, the lighting mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period. Returns to the lighting mode before the start of the flash effect when winning a prize in the previous period. Incidentally, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y remain off after the start timing of the flash performance at the time of winning a prize in the latter half.

In addition, as described above, the blinking of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) with the brightness C2 and the period T0, excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y, is as follows. The same mode as the mode before the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (the light emission mode shown in FIG. 11-29(A)) is a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image). A gradation using blue-based colors, a gradation using red-based colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.) is executed.

The cycle T2, which is the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-mentioned cycle T1, but shorter than the above-mentioned cycle T0 (lamp blinking cycle length: T0>T2 >T1). Incidentally, during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning a prize in the latter half, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 (H), 11-33 (I), and 11-33 (J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with a transparent black image 135SG005B overlappingly displayed over the entire first display area 135SG005F except for the active display area 135SG005A. The silhouette image 135SG005S in the main feature section 135SG is displayed in blue so that it can be easily recognized by the player when displayed overlappingly with the black image 135SG005B.

Note that in this feature section 135SG, an example is given in which the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in blue so that it is easily visible to the player when it is displayed overlappingly with the black image 135SG005B, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed in a color other than blue, such as green or red. In particular, when the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed in multiple colors such as the aforementioned blue, green, and red, the jackpot expectation level may be changed depending on which color the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed. good. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the color of the silhouette image 135SG005S, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 (H) and 11-33 (J), in this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device A small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left end of 5. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed overlappingly, and the player can display the silhouette image 135SG005S during the winning flash effect. Regardless of whether or not the variable display is being executed, it is possible to confirm whether or not the variable display is being executed by visually recognizing the small pattern 135SG005M.

As shown in FIG. 11-33 (J), FIG. 11-34 (K), and FIG. 11-34 (L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the image display device 5 displays the decorative symbol and The small symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination that indicates an error (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of late prize winning in this feature section 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is the symbol confirmation period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 11-33 (J), even during the symbol confirmation period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R are When winning a prize, a sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at volume V2.

When the symbol confirmation period ends, a new variable display starts. At this time, in the image display device 5, the pending display displayed at the beginning in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D is moved to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display, and is also displayed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted to the right one by one. Furthermore, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is also started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (K) to 11-41 (Z), in the variable display that precedes the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, the speaker 8L, which is the flash performance during the later winning event, The output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from 8R at the volume V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in Figures 11-38 (S) to 11-40 (X), in the variable display where pseudo-continuous effects are executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (Figure 11-40 (W) ) Refer to this feature section 135SG. In the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, a decorative pattern indicating a normal number is temporarily stopped, and a special pattern indicating a temporary stop is temporarily stopped in the decorative pattern display area 5C inside. ), as a flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter half, output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, the brightness of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning a prize, blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5. The silhouette image 135SG005S of is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (Y) and 11-41 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is off due to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the decorative patterns and small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late prize winning in the present feature section 135SG is also executed during the symbol determination period of the variable display when the normal reach is off. That is, as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (Y) and 11-41 (Z), even during the symbol confirmation period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at a volume of V2.

As shown in FIGS. 11-40 (W) and 11-40 (X), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are Light is emitted in a light emitting manner corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if it is the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern in the variable display, light is emitted in blue at brightness C2), and the background image is displayed based on the execution of the variable display again. Returns to the light emission mode according to the . Furthermore, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop, so the player can It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not ended yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-42(a) and 11-42(b), when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started, the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started, and the The pending display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIG. 11-43(c) to FIG. 11-47(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is continued. Further, during variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see FIGS. 11-43(d) and 11-44(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figure 11-45 (g) to Figure 11-46 (j) reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is subject to the winning flash performance, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 11-46 (j)), the flash performance from speakers 8L and 8R is performed as a late winning flash performance. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is outputted at the volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 11-45(g) and FIG. 11-46(j), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are not connected to the decorative pattern. The light is emitted in a lighting mode corresponding to the temporary stop (for example, if it is the first temporary stop, the light is emitted in blue at brightness C2, and if it is the second temporary stop, it is green at brightness C2), and the display is re-variable. Based on this, the light emission mode returns to the one corresponding to the background image. Although not shown in the feature section 135SG, if the pseudo continuous effect is executed three times during variable display, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacker The lamp 9c and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emitting manner (for example, red at brightness C2) corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern, and emit light in accordance with the background image based on execution of variable display again. Return to aspect.

As shown in FIGS. 11-48(m) and 11-48(n), when the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F once whites out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F becomes displayed in white), then the ready-to-reach effect is started. In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F becomes white-out, thereby suggesting that a super reach effect will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the whiteout timing, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of winning in the later period, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

Also, at the whiteout timing, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y stop blinking at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0. . The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d remain off during the whiteout period.

That is, during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d remain off. Then, from the timing when the whiteout ends, in accordance with the above-mentioned reach effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d respond to the reach effect. The light emission mode (lighting at brightness C1) starts.

Further, during the whiteout period, output of variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and there is no sound, and from the timing when the whiteout ends, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, At the same time that the attacker lamp 9c and the movable lamp 9d begin to emit light (lighting at brightness C1) in accordance with the reach effect, the speakers 8L and 8R begin outputting the sound corresponding to the reach effect, which is the sound that corresponds to the reach effect. . In addition, as the sound corresponding to the reach effect in this feature section 135SG, BGM, etc., which is different from the sound corresponding to the variable display, must be output so that the player can recognize that the reach effect (super reach effect) is in progress. Bye.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-28, if a starting prize occurs during execution of the variable display, and it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect based on the starting winning, the corresponding starting door lamp lighting effect will be displayed. From the timing of the starting winning, the starting port lamp 135SG009S changes the color according to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect (for example, blue when the display pattern of the pending display is display pattern β, and the display pattern of the pending display is display pattern γ). (in red), the light starts emitting light.

The light emission of the starting port lamp 135SG009S is a performance that is executed completely independently of the above-mentioned winning flash performance, and regardless of the blinking mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F or the game effect lamp 9, the above-mentioned starting Light emission in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the pending display notice performance is continued from the time of winning to the end of the target variable display of the starting opening lamp light emission performance (target variable display of the flash performance at the time of winning).

Next, a case will be described in which the execution of the pending display preview performance is not determined together with the flash performance at the time of winning in the starting winning while the variable display is being executed.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 and 11-49 (A), while the variable display is being executed, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of decorative patterns, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the variable display. The corresponding sound is output at volume V2. In addition, while the variable display is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks at a cycle T0 according to the variable display (Figures 11-27 (A) to 11-27 (Blinking in the manner shown in (D)) is controlled.

Furthermore, while the variable display is being executed, an image corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the preview performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R are displaying the image of the preview performance. A sound corresponding to the performance pattern (sound corresponding to the preview performance) is output at volume V2. Further, as the pending memory, there are three first special figure pending memories (three pending displays are displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D).

If a prize is won in the first starting slot (starting prize) during such a variable display, and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the figure As shown in FIG. 11-28 and FIG. 11-49 (B), a flash effect is started at the time of first-term winning.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 and 11-49 (B), the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume of V1 (V1>V2) for the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, 11-50(C), and 11-50(D), the display of the effect image 135SG005E starts from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the cycle T1. In the blinking control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

In addition, when the first period winning flash effect is started, as shown in Figure 11-49 (B), Figure 11-50 (C), and Figure 11-50 (D), as the above-mentioned specific display start effect A, An appearance animation is displayed in which the pending display that is the target of the winning flash effect (first period winning flash effect) that is being executed gradually appears from the bottom to the top (Figure 11-19 (B-1) to Figure 11-19 ( (See B-4). Note that the pending display whose appearance animation has been completed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display as a specific display rotating display effect like other pending displays.

In particular, when the specific display start effect A is executed together with the winning flash effect, the appearance animation of the pending display ends when the effect image 135SG005E is still being displayed on the image display device 5. On the other hand, when the above-described specific display start effect B is executed together with the winning flash effect, the appearance animation of the pending display ends after the display of the effect image 135SG005E ends on the image display device 5 (see FIGS. 11-29 to 11-29). 11-32). That is, when specific display start effect A is executed, the display of the pending display (appearance animation) is completed at an earlier timing than when specific display start effect B is executed, and the transition to rotation animation is made.

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, if a starting winning occurs during the variable display and it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the display will be performed before the display of the pending display based on the starting winning is completed. At this time, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. Incidentally, the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect A in the feature section 135SG is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period.

When the first-term winning flash performance ends, the second-term winning flash performance starts from the ending timing. As for the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half, as shown in Figures 11-28, 11-52 (G) and 11-52 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning from speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T2 (period T2>period T1). Furthermore, display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

In addition, at the end timing of the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period and the start timing of the flash performance at the time of winning in the second period, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The light emitting mode (blinking at brightness C1 and cycle T1) of the attacker lamp 9c and movable lamp 9d) corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period ends. The light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y corresponds to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. The display switches to the corresponding mode (blinking at brightness C2 and period T0 shown in FIGS. 11-27(A) to 11-27(D)). In other words, the lighting mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period. Returns to the lighting mode before the start of the flash effect when winning a prize in the previous period. Incidentally, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y remain off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter half.

In addition, as described above, the blinking of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d) with the brightness C2 and period T0, excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y, is as follows. The same mode as the mode before the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (the light emission mode shown in FIG. 11-29(A)) is the color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image). A gradation using blue-based colors, a gradation using red-based colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.) are performed.

The cycle T2, which is the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-mentioned cycle T1, but shorter than the above-mentioned cycle T0 (lamp blinking cycle length: T0>T2 >T1). Incidentally, during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning a prize in the latter half, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 11-52 (H), 11-53 (I), and 11-53 (J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with a transparent black image 135SG005B overlappingly displayed over the entire first display area 135SG005F except for the active display area 135SG005A.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-52 (H) and FIG. 11-53 (J), in this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device A small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left end of 5. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed overlappingly, and the player can display the silhouette image 135SG005S during the winning flash effect. Regardless of whether or not the variable display is being executed, it is possible to confirm whether or not the variable display is being executed by visually recognizing the small pattern 135SG005M.

As shown in FIG. 11-53 (J), FIG. 11-54 (K), and FIG. 11-54 (L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the image display device 5 displays decorative symbols and small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late prize winning in this feature section 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is the symbol confirmation period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 11-53 (J), even during the symbol confirmation period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R are When winning a prize, a sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at volume V2.

When the symbol confirmation period ends, a new variable display starts. At this time, in the image display device 5, the pending display displayed at the beginning in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D is moved to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display, and is also displayed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted to the right one by one. Further, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is also started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 11-54 (K) to 11-61 (Z), in the variable display that precedes the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, the speaker 8L, which is the flash performance during the later winning time, The output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from 8R at the volume V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in Figures 11-58 (S) to 11-60 (X), in the variable display in which pseudo-continuous effects are executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (Figure 11-60 (W) ) Refer to this characteristic section 135SG. In the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, a decorative pattern indicating a normal number is temporarily stopped, and a special pattern indicating a temporary stop is temporarily stopped in the decorative pattern display area 5C inside. Also, as a flash effect at the time of winning in the latter half, output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, the brightness of the lamp 135SG009F for the winning flash at the time of winning at the brightness C2 and blinking at the cycle T2, and the image display device 5 Display of silhouette image 135SG005S is executed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 11-61 (Y) and 11-51 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is off due to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the decorative patterns and small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late prize winning in the present feature section 135SG is also executed during the symbol determination period of the variable display when the normal reach is off. That is, as shown in FIGS. 11-61 (Y) and 11-61 (Z), even during the symbol confirmation period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at a volume of V2.

As shown in FIGS. 11-60 (W) and 11-60 (X), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are not activated. Light is emitted in a light emitting manner corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if it is the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern in the variable display, light is emitted in blue at brightness C2), and the background image is displayed based on the execution of the variable display again. Returns to the light emission mode according to the . Furthermore, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop, so the player can It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not ended yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-62(a) and 11-62(b), when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started, the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started, and the The pending display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIG. 11-63(c) to FIG. 11-67(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is continued. Further, during variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see FIGS. 11-63(d) and 11-64(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figure 11-65 (g) to Figure 11-66 (j) reference).

As shown in FIG. 11-65(g) and FIG. 11-66(j), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are not connected to the decorative pattern. The light is emitted in a lighting mode corresponding to the temporary stop (for example, if it is the first temporary stop, it is blue at brightness C2, and if it is the second temporary stop, it is green at brightness C2), and the display is re-variable. Based on this, the light emission mode returns to the one corresponding to the background image. Although not shown in the feature section 135SG, when performing three pseudo-continuous effects during variable display, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacker The lamp 9c and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emitting manner (for example, red at brightness C2) corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern, and emit light in accordance with the background image based on execution of variable display again. Return to aspect.

In particular, even in the variable display that is subject to the winning flash performance, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 11-66 (j)), the flash performance from speakers 8L and 8R is performed as a late winning flash performance. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is outputted at the volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-68(m) and 11-68(n), when the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F once whites out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F becomes displayed in white), then the ready-to-reach effect is started. In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F becomes white-out, thereby suggesting that a super reach effect will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the whiteout timing, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect during the latter period, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

Also, at the whiteout timing, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y stop blinking at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0. . These main lamps 9a, frame lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, and movable lamps 9d remain off during the whiteout period, but after the whiteout ends, they emit light in a manner that corresponds to the reach effect. .

Further, during the whiteout period, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and there is no sound, and from the timing when the whiteout ends, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, At the same time that the attacker lamp 9c and the movable lamp 9d begin to emit light (lighting at brightness C1) in accordance with the reach effect, the speakers 8L and 8R begin outputting the sound corresponding to the reach effect, which is the sound that corresponds to the reach effect. . In addition, as the sound corresponding to the reach effect in this feature section 135SG, BGM, etc., which is different from the sound corresponding to the variable display, must be output so that the player can recognize that the reach effect (super reach effect) is in progress. Bye.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 135SG, FIG. 11-28, FIG. 11-29(A) to FIG. 11-32(H), FIG. As shown in D), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light before the display of the pending display is completed, making it easier for the player to recognize the pending display that is the subject of the winning flash effect. . Furthermore, it has a winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a first light emitting means in this invention, and a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d as second light emitting means in this invention. As shown in 11-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at a brightness of C1 and a cycle of T1 during the execution period of the first winning flash effect, and at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T1 during the second winning flash effect. While blinking at T2, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d blink at brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first half, and at the time of winning in the second half. During the execution period of the flash effect, it flashes at the brightness C2 and the period T0, so during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, not only the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, but also the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacker lamp 9c As for the movable lamp 9d, it is possible to make the winning flash effect more prominent by blinking at the brightness C1 and the cycle T1, so that the game can more easily recognize the pending display that is the subject of the winning flash effect. It has become.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, when a new starting winning occurs during the variable display, the holding memory based on the starting winning is subject to the execution or non-execution of the winning flash effect and the execution of the holding display preview effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, if a new starting winning occurs when the variable display is not being executed and there is no pending memory, the starting winning winning will be determined. It may be possible to determine whether or not to execute a flash effect at the time of winning and whether to execute a pending display notice effect based on the pending memory based on the above. Specifically, when a new starting prize occurs during variable display, display pattern α to display pattern γ (pending display preview effect) are displayed in active display area 135SG005A as specific display start effect A or specific display start effect B. After executing the appearance animation of the active display of either display pattern (display pattern in case of non-execution or display pattern in case of execution of suspended display preview effect), rotate display of the active display as a specific display rotation display effect. At the same time, based on the start of the variable display based on the starting winning, a winning flash effect (early winning flash effect and later winning flash effect) may be executed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-15, 11-30 (D) to 11-32 (H), and 11-49 (B) to 11-50 (D), the specific display start effect is suspended. The part where the appearance animation that gradually appears from the bottom to the top is displayed, and the parts shown in Figures 11-15, 11-30 (D) to 11-32 (H), and 11-49 (B) to 11- As shown in FIG. 50(D), the display consists of a pending display and a rotating animation, and as shown in FIGS. 11-19 and 11-20, from the timing when the appearing animation of the pending display is completed, Since the rotating animation of the hold display is started, the player's attention to the hold display can be increased.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-29 (A) to 11-32 (H), when performing specific display start effect B, the winning flash effect is started from a timing before the start of display of the pending display. Since the flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d emit light at the time of winning, the flash effect at the time of winning can be made more conspicuous. In addition, in this feature section 135SG, even when executing the specific display start effect A shown in FIGS. 11-49(A) to 11-50(D), the winning flash effect is started from a timing before the display start of the pending display. Since the flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light when winning a prize, it is possible to make the flash performance more prominent when winning a prize.

In addition, the execution period of specific display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, and the execution period of specific display start effect B is 1.2 seconds. As shown in -50 (D), since the winning flash effect starts before the end timing of the specific display start effect A, the display pattern of the pending display is any of display patterns α to display patterns γ. Also, since the winning flash performance can be started before the specific display start performance ends, the player can surely recognize the pending display that is the object of the winning flash performance.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-28, Figure 11-29 (A), Figure 11-29 (B), Figure 11-49 (A), and Figure 11-49 (B), when winning a prize based on the starting prize. When it is decided to execute the flash effect, the player can start the flash effect by turning off the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d. Recognizable.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are turned off once. Although the present invention is not limited to this, when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, and the frame The lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d are set to emit light at a lower brightness than the previous brightness (for example, if the light was emitted at the brightness C2 up to then, the brightness C3 is lower than the brightness C2). It may be changed. In other words, the "low brightness state" in this invention includes a state in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d are emitting light at low brightness, as well as a state in which they are turned off. It also includes a state in which the light is on (a state in which no light is emitted).

Also, as shown in Figures 11-29(A) to 11-48(n) and Figures 11-49(A) to 11-68(n), during variable display, a preview effect is being executed. It is possible to execute the flash effect at the time of winning and when it is not in progress, and the speakers 8L and 8R execute the flash effect at the time of winning while the variable display is being executed, as shown in Figure 11-29 (B). When doing so, the sound corresponding to the variable display is output at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output at the volume V1 (V1>V2), and when the winning flash effect is executed while the preview effect is being executed, The sound corresponding to the preview performance is outputted at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is outputted at the volume V1 (V1>V2). Therefore, even if the speakers 8L and 8R are outputting the sound corresponding to the variable display and the sound corresponding to the preview effect, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning can be outputted so that the player can easily hear the flash effect at the time of winning. By outputting a corresponding sound, a player can easily recognize the execution of a flash performance when winning a prize.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is set to the volume V1 from the speakers 8L and 8R, so that the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the preview effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display body. , and the sound corresponding to the preview effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at volume V2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect when winning a prize is output as the sound corresponding to the preview effect. As a form of outputting with priority over the sound corresponding to the variable display and the winning flash effect, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the preview effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at a lower volume than the volume V2. (For example, the volume may be output at V3).

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, a mode has been exemplified in which the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the preview effect or the sound corresponding to the variable display body, but the present invention is not limited to this. When winning a prize, it is not necessary to output the sound corresponding to the flash effect with priority over the sound corresponding to the preview effect or the sound corresponding to the variable display. Specifically, if the preview effect is started while the winning flash effect is being executed (while outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect or the sound corresponding to the strange display from speakers 8L and 8R), the winning effect from speakers 8L and 8R will start. It is also possible to temporarily stop the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect and output only the sound corresponding to the variable display and the sound corresponding to the preview effect, or only one of the sound corresponding to the preview effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in game interest due to the player having difficulty in hearing the sound corresponding to the preview effect or the sound corresponding to the variable display due to the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-28, 11-29 (A) to 11-32 (H), and 11-49 (A) to 11-50 (D), when winning a prize according to the starting prize, When it is decided to execute the flash effect, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is started from the speakers 8L and 8R, and then the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started and the appearance animation of the pending display is completed. Therefore, by outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, it is possible to quickly make the player aware that a starting winning has occurred and that the execution of the winning flash effect has been decided, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. can.

In addition, this feature section 135SG exemplifies a form in which after the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started, and the appearance animation of the pending display is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is started from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the appearance animation of the pending display start. You can do it like this.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-28, during the execution period of the first period winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C1, and during the second period winning flash effect, the winning moment flash By flashing the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at a brightness of C2 (C1>C2), at least the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be made to flash at a brightness of C1 to make the player aware of the start of the winning flash effect. It is possible to prevent the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from blinking at the brightness C1 even during the execution period of the later winning flash performance, which obstructs other performances and reduces game interest.

In this feature section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at a brightness C1 and cycle T2 as the first-term winning flash performance, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the second-term winning flash performance. As an example of a "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis", a mode is shown in which the light is blinked at a luminance C2 lower than the luminance C1 and at a cycle T2 that is longer than the cycle T1. In other words, the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the late winning flash performance of the feature section 135SG is a low-speed blinking mode where the degree of emphasis is low due to the slow blinking speed (long blinking cycle). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and includes both a low brightness mode in which the degree of emphasis is low due to low brightness, and the present invention is not limited to this. The "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the lamp 135SG009F may be only one of the low-speed blinking mode and the low-intensity mode.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-28, the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the second half is the period during which the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, and the period in which the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. Since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2 before and after the start of the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect, It becomes easier for the player to recognize that the display is variable, and the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S, the effect image 135SG005E can be displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the winning flash effect in the previous period, so that the player can recognize the start of the winning flash effect. During the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the second half, by displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 continues to display the effect image 135SG005E, which obstructs other displays and reduces the enjoyment of the game. can be suppressed from decreasing.

In particular, in the main characteristic portion 135SG, the effect image 135SG005E is brighter than the silhouette image 135SG005S, as shown in FIGS. Since the effect image 135SG005E is displayed in color and the display area on the image display device 5 is wide, the player can effectively recognize the start of the winning flash effect by displaying the effect image 135SG005E.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period. Now, a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8l and 8R at a volume of V2 (V1>V2). In this way, by outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect at the volume V1 as the winning flash effect, it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize that the winning flash effect has started. At the same time, during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the later period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at the volume V2, thereby preventing a decrease in gaming interest due to other effects being obstructed by the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning. It can be suppressed.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, while the flash effect at the time of winning a prize is being executed in the latter half, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is outputted at the volume V2, so that other effects are obstructed by the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning. Although the present invention has been exemplified as a mode for suppressing a decline in gaming interest, the present invention is not limited to this, and by not outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect while the later winning flash effect is being executed, other effects may be suppressed when winning a prize. It may also be possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to interference by the sound corresponding to the flash effect.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-29(A) to 11-48(n), during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the later period, the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is started. During the symbol confirmation period of the variable display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink, that is, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the symbol confirmation command has been received (the confirmation command reception flag has been set) or not. Regardless of whether the display time timer has timed out or not, by continuing to flash the winning flash lamp 135SG009F during the symbol confirmation period, the player will be controlled into a jackpot gaming state. The feeling of anticipation can be maintained accurately until the start of the variable display which is the object of the flash effect when winning a prize, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, as a flash performance at the time of winning in the first period, the lamp for the winning flash 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are set in a mode (brightness) according to the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period. C1 and cycle T1), and after the end of the first period winning flash performance, as the second period winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is set in a mode (brightness C2 and cycle T2) according to the second period winning flash performance. ), while the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are emitted in a manner corresponding to the background image (brightness C2 and period T0). is not limited to this, and the performance control CPU 120 clears the process timer for the first period winning flash performance at the timing when the first period winning flash performance ends, so that the performance control CPU 120 clears the process timer for the first period winning flash performance during the execution period of the second period winning flash performance. It may be possible to prevent the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d from emitting light in a manner corresponding to the previous winning flash performance.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3, a small pattern 135SG005M is arranged at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 11-33 (J), the pattern is confirmed. During the period, the small symbol 135SG005M is displayed with variable display stopped, so even if the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to emit light during the symbol confirmation period, the small symbol 135SG005M is derived in combination to indicate a win. Since it is displayed, the player can be made aware that the symbol confirmation period is in progress.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-33 (J), while the winning flash effect is being executed, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small Since the symbol 135SG005M is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed overlappingly with the small symbol 135SG005M, making it difficult for the player to recognize the end of the variable display. You can prevent it from getting stowed away.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, it is possible to execute a pseudo-continuous effect that includes temporary stopping and variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 during variable display, and variable display during execution of the winning flash effect. In the case where a pseudo continuous effect is executed, when the decorative pattern temporarily stops, a special symbol stops in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C (see Figure 11-40, etc.) Silhouette as a flash effect at the time of winning Since the images 135SG005S can be displayed overlappingly, the special symbol is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S, giving the player a sense of surprise and increasing his enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 and 11-42(a) to 11-47(l), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display that is the subject of the flash effect when winning a prize. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the object of the flash effect when winning a prize, and it is possible to improve the interest of the variable display that is the object of the flash effect when winning.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-28, during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at a brightness of C2 and a period of T2 before the start of the ready-to-win effect. While the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off at the start timing, as shown in FIG. 11-22, due to the generation of static electricity, etc., the performance control CPU 120 determines that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win performance of the variable display of the performance target. If this is not possible, at the end timing of the variable display (timing at which the symbol confirmation command is received), which is a timing later than the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect, a second-term winning flash effect including blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is performed again. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort when the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect does not end at the timing of the start of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11-22, if the performance control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is the start timing of the ready-to-reach performance of the variable display of the performance target due to the generation of static electricity, etc., the performance control CPU 120 Since the late winning flash performance is ended based on receiving the command, it is possible to further reduce the sense of discomfort when ending the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash performance.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-21, if a winning start occurs at the first start opening while the Super Reach reach effect is being executed, the execution of the winning flash effect is not determined, so the Super Reach reach effect is not decided. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-17, in this feature section 135SG, the pending display and active display can be displayed in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ with different jackpot expectations, and as shown in FIG. As shown, when it is decided to display the hold display or active display in the display pattern β or display pattern γ, the starting port lamp 135SG009S flashes the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a winning flash effect or the game effect. Regardless of the lighting mode of the lamp 9, etc., the light is emitted in a color according to display pattern β and display pattern γ from the occurrence of a starting winning to the end of the variable display based on the starting winning, so the player can see the pending display and active display. Since the display mode can also be recognized by the light emission mode (emission color) of the starting port lamp 135SG009S, the game enjoyment can be improved.

Although the characteristic parts of this invention have been explained above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic parts, and even changes and additions within the scope of the gist of this invention are not included in this invention. It will be done.

For example, although the flash effect at the time of late prize winning in the feature section 135SG is executed regardless of whether or not it is during the symbol confirmation period (while the variable display is stopped), the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in Figures 11-69 to 11-89 as a modified example 135SG-1, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect as the winning flash effect in the later period, the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the silhouette. The display of the image 135SG005S, etc. may not be executed during the symbol confirmation period.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-69 and FIG. 11-70 (A), while variable display is being executed, the image display device 5 executes variable display of decorative patterns, and the speakers 8L and 8R , the variable display compatible sound is output at volume V2. In addition, while the variable display is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks at a cycle T0 according to the variable display (Figures 11-27 (A) to 11-27 (Blinking in the manner shown in (D)) is controlled.

Furthermore, while the variable display is being executed, an image corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the preview performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R are displaying the image of the preview performance. A sound corresponding to the performance pattern (sound corresponding to the preview performance) is output at volume V2. Further, as the pending memory, there are three first special figure pending memories (three pending displays are displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D).

If a prize is won in the first starting slot (starting prize) during such a variable display, and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the figure As shown in FIG. 11-69 and FIG. 11-70 (B), a flash effect is started at the time of first-term winning.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-69 and 11-70 (B), the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume of V1 (V1>V2) for the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-69, 11-71(C), and 11-71(D), the display of the effect image 135SG005E starts from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the cycle T1. In the blinking control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

In addition, when the first period winning flash effect is started, as shown in Figure 11-71 (D), Figure 11-72 (E), and Figure 11-72 (F), as the above-mentioned specific display start effect B, An animation in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is blink-controlled, is displayed, and an animation in which the character A moves to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D is displayed. After the character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed (the fourth position in the case of this modification 135SG-1). An animation of attacking (acting) is displayed.

After character A acts on the first pending storage display area 135SG005D, the pending display that is the target of the winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) that is currently being executed appears gradually from the bottom to the top at the position where the action occurred. An appearance animation is displayed (see Figures 11-20 (D-1) to 11-20 (D-5)). Note that the pending display whose appearance animation has been completed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display as a specific display rotating display effect like other pending displays.

In other words, in this modification example 135SG-1, if a starting prize occurs during the variable display and it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, then the display of the pending display based on the starting winning is completed. First, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. In addition, the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect B in this modification example 135SG-1 is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half (Fig. 11-73 (G) and Fig. 11-73(H)).

When the first-term winning flash performance ends, the second-term winning flash performance starts from the end timing. As for the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter half, as shown in Figures 11-69, 11-73 (G) and 11-73 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and period T2 (period T2>period T1), and the brightness C2 and the period T2 of the gaming effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y. Blinking (blinking in the manner shown in FIGS. 11-27(A) to 11-27(D)), every fixed period of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5. starts to be displayed.

Note that the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the period T2 is in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image) A gradation using blue-based colors, a gradation using red-based colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.) is executed.

The cycle T2, which is the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-mentioned cycle T1, but shorter than the above-mentioned cycle T0 (lamp blinking cycle length: T0>T2). >T1). Incidentally, during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 11-74(I) and 11-74(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the transparent black image 135SG005B overlappingly displayed over the entire area of one display area 135SG005F.

As shown in FIG. 11-74 (J), FIG. 11-75 (K), and FIG. 11-75 (L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the image display device 5 displays decorative symbols and small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. As shown in FIGS. 11-69, 11-76 (M), and 11-76 (N), during the symbol confirmation period from the end timing of the variable display to the start timing of the next variable display, the late The output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the winning flash effect and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are stopped, and the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable The body lamp 9d continues to blink only in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5.

When the symbol confirmation period ends, a new variable display starts. At this time, in the image display device 5, the pending display displayed at the beginning in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D is moved to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display, and is also displayed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted to the right one by one. Furthermore, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is also started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 11-75 (K) to 11-82 (Z), in the variable display that precedes the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, the speaker 8L as the flash performance during the latter period, While the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from 8R at the volume V2, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed, During the symbol confirmation period, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter half, the brightness of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at C2 and the blinking period T2, and the image display. The silhouette image 135SG005S is never displayed on the device 5.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-79 (S) to 11-81 (X), in the variable display where the pseudo continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (FIG. 11-81 ( See W). In this modified example 135SG-1, decorative symbols indicating normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and a special symbol indicating the temporary stop is placed in the inner decorative symbol display area 5C. (temporarily stops), as the flash performance at the time of winning in the latter half, output of the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning from speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, flashing at brightness C2 and cycle T2 of the flash lamp 135SG009F at time of winning, and image display. Display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the device 5 is executed.

In addition, in Figure 11-81 (W), while the winning flash effect is being executed, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash effect is The brightness C2 and cycle T2 of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F are not executed, but depending on the timing of the temporary stop, the brightness C2 and cycle T2 of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may change depending on the timing of the temporary stop. Flashing is now performed. That is, in this modification 135SG-1, for the variable display that precedes the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, the winning flash performance is continuously executed during the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 11-82 (Y) and 11-82 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is off due to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the decorative patterns and small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late prize winning in the present feature section 135SG is also executed during the symbol determination period of the variable display when the normal reach is off. That is, as shown in FIGS. 11-82 (Y) and 11-82 (Z), even during the symbol determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at a volume of V2.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-81 (W) and 11-81 (X), during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small pattern 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop. Therefore, the player can recognize that the variable display has not ended yet by visually recognizing the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-83(a) and 11-83(b), when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started, the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The pending display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIG. 11-84(c) to FIG. 11-88(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is continued. Further, during variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see FIG. 11-84(d) and FIG. 11-85(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figure 11-86 (g) to Figure 11-87 (j) reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is subject to the winning flash performance, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 11-87 (j)), the flash performance from speakers 8L and 8R is performed as the latter winning flash performance. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is outputted at the volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-89(m) and 11-89(n), when the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F once whites out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F becomes displayed in white), then the ready-to-reach effect is started. In addition, in this modification 135SG-1, the first display area 135SG005F becomes white-out, which suggests that the super reach effect will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the whiteout timing, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect during the latter period, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends. On the other hand, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, and the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 except the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the period T0 are continued.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-69, if a starting prize occurs during the execution of the variable display, and it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect based on the starting winning, the corresponding starting door lamp lighting effect will be displayed. From the timing of the starting winning, the starting port lamp 135SG009S changes color according to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect (for example, blue if the display pattern of the pending display is display pattern β, and the display pattern of the pending display is display pattern γ). (in red), the light starts emitting light.

The light emission of the starting port lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the winning flash effect described above, and regardless of the blinking mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F or the game effect lamp 9, the above-mentioned starting Light emission in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the pending display notice performance is continued from the time of winning to the end of the target variable display of the start lamp light emission performance (target variable display of the flash performance at the time of winning).

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-1, when the winning flash effect is started based on the starting winning, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is stopped as a late winning flash effect during the symbol confirmation period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misperceiving that the variable display is in progress due to the winning flash lamp 135SG009F being turned on continuously during the pattern confirmation period as a flash effect at the time of winning in the later period. ing. Furthermore, during the period of temporary suspension of the decorative symbols in the variable display that are the target of the flash performance at the time of winning, and during the temporary suspension period of the decorative symbols in the variable display that are the target of the flash performance at the time of winning, the flash lamp 135SG009F for the winning flash is activated. By continuing to blink at the brightness C2 and the period T2, it is possible to prevent the game from mistakenly assuming that the variable display has ended even though the decorative symbols are in the temporary stop period.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-1, during the pattern confirmation period during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash effect at the time of winning the winning flash 135SG009F, and the silhouette. Although a mode in which the display of the image 135SG005S is stopped is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is possible to prevent the erroneous recognition that this is the case, output the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, turn on the winning flash lamp 135SG009F for the later winning flash effect, or display the silhouette image 135SG005S. Alternatively, only two may be executed.

Furthermore, in this modification 135SG-1, during the pattern confirmation period during the execution period of the late winning flash performance, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash performance as the late winning flash performance, the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the silhouette. Although the embodiment in which the display of image 135SG005S, etc. is not executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, but the winning flash as a late winning flash effect during the symbol confirmation period during the execution period of the late winning flash effect. For example, the performance control CPU 120 may receive a symbol confirmation command during execution of the flash performance when winning a prize in the second half. Based on this, by clearing the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the later period, during the pattern confirmation period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the time of winning is output as the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period, the light emission of the lamp 135SG009F for flash at the time of winning, The silhouette image 135SG005S may not be displayed.

In this case, the performance control CP 120, based on receiving the first variable display start command, selects the flash performance process table for the second period of winning and resets and starts the process timer for the flash performance for the second period of winning. By doing so, it is only necessary to start the flash effect at the time of winning a prize (output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S) in response to the start of a new variable display.

In addition, as a mode in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F does not emit light as the late winning flash performance during the symbol confirmation period during the execution period of the latter winning flash performance, for example, the performance control CPU 120 may Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command during the execution of the performance, the lamp control board 14 is sent to the lamp control board 14 for the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, instead of the lighting control data according to the process data of the process timer for the flash performance at the time of late winning. Lighting control data that maintains the lights off (for example, "0:0:0" indicating lights off as the RGB value of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F) may be output continuously until the variable display start command is received. .

In addition, if you do not execute the flash effect at the time of winning during the symbol confirmation period in this way, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning will be output again from the start timing of the new variable display, the lighting of the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning time at the time of winning, the silhouette image The display of 135SG005S may be re-executed from the beginning of each cycle (see Figure 11-69), or from the start timing of the new variable display, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect may be output, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be turned on, The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S may be restarted from the middle of each cycle.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-1, if the variable display ends during the execution of the flash performance at the time of late winning, during the symbol determination period of the variable display, the flash performance from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash performance at the time of late winning While stopping the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect when winning a prize and the display of the silhouette image 235SG005S, it also stops the output of the flash effect compatible sound and the display of the silhouette image 235SG005S. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d will continue to blink in this manner, but the present invention is not limited to this. Blinking may also be stopped. In particular, as a form of stopping the blinking of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d during the symbol confirmation period, the in-lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are stopped during the pattern confirmation period. The body lamp 9d may be turned off, or the in-lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d may be set to a certain color (for example, the background displayed on the image display device 5) during the pattern determination period. It may also be maintained in a state where it is continuously lit (color corresponding to the image).

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, in the explanation of FIG. 11-8, it is stated that a plurality of reach effects may be provided as the super reach effect. If you set up a reach performance of multiple Super Reach, make the jackpot expectation different between the reach performances of multiple Super Reach (for example, as a reach performance of Super Reach, the reach performance of Super Reach α and the reach performance of Super Reach α have a higher jackpot expectation than the reach performance of Super Reach α (a reach effect with a high super reach β may be provided).

In particular, when it is possible to execute reach effects of multiple super reaches with different jackpot expectations, as shown in FIGS. 11-90(A) and 11-90(B) as modification 135SG-2. , the movable body 32 can be moved between a retracted position (for example, a position above the image display device 5) and a presentation position (for example, a central front position when viewed from the front of the image display device 5), and a flash presentation when winning a prize. If the target variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach α (a variable display that executes a reach effect of super reach α), the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 during the variable display is By repeatedly moving the movable body 32 between the retracted position and the retracted position (for example, the intermediate position between the retracted position and the production position described above) during the period in which the first display area 135SG005F except for the first display area 135SG005F is once white-out, the movable body 32 Execute a moving body motion suggestion performance that suggests moving to the performance position, and when winning a prize, the variable display that is the target of the flash performance will be a variable display with a variation pattern of Super Reach β (Execute the reach performance of Super Reach β) (variable display), the movable body 32 is further evacuated after the above-described movable body motion suggestion effect is executed during a period in which the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is once whited out. A movable body motion performance may be performed in which the moving body is moved from a position to a performance position.

By doing this, during the whiteout period, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the movement of the movable body 32, and when the movable body 32 moves to the performance position (when the movable body movement performance is executed) Since the player can be informed that the movable body motion performance will execute the reach performance of super reach β, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the reach performance of super reach α, the game enjoyment can be improved.

For example, if the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach α, as shown in Figures 11-91 (A) and 11-91 (B), When the variable display starts, output of sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R starts. In addition, in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is continued. Further, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see FIG. 11-91(B), FIG. 11-92(C), and FIG. 11-92(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figures 11-93 (E) to 11-94 (H) reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is subject to the winning flash performance, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 11-94 (H)), the flash performance from speakers 8L and 8R is performed as a later winning flash performance. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is outputted at the volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-95(I) to 11-96(L), when the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F temporarily whites out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F becomes displayed in white). In addition, in this modification 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F becomes white-out, which suggests that the super reach effect will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIG. 11-90(A) and FIG. 11-96(K) to FIG. 11-97(N), during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F The lighting at the brightness C2 and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are completed. As a movable body motion suggestion performance, the movable body motion suggestion performance is based on the fact that the movable body 32 repeatedly reciprocates between the retreat position and the suggested position a predetermined number of times (4 reciprocations in this modified example 135SG-2) by a drive mechanism (not shown). When the pandemic ends, the whiteout period also ends. In addition, during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion production, the output of the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion production is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. Note that the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect is a sound effect that allows the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retracted position and the suggested position (for example, a sound effect such as "rattle"). ) etc. can be output.

As shown in FIG. 11-90(A), FIG. 11-98(O), and FIG. 11-98(P), from the timing when the movable body motion suggestion presentation and whiteout are completed, the image display device 5 At the same time as the reach effect of reach α starts, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, and winning flash lamp 135SG009F start lighting with brightness C1 in a manner corresponding to the reach effect. Then, the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting the ready-to-reach effect sound (such as BGM different from the variable display corresponding sound) corresponding to the ready-to-reach effect of the super reach α.

In addition, if the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach β, as shown in Figure 11-99 (A) and Figure 11-99 (B), the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is When the variable display starts, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R starts. In addition, in the variable display, a flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter half is continued. Further, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see FIG. 11-99(B), FIG. 11-100(C), and FIG. 11-100(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figures 11-101 (E) to 11-102 (H) reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is subject to the winning flash performance, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 11-102 (H)), the flash performance from speakers 8L and 8R is performed as a later winning flash performance. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is outputted at the volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-103 (I) to 11-104 (L), when the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F temporarily whites out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F becomes displayed in white). In addition, in this modification 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F becomes white-out, which suggests that the super reach effect will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIG. 11-90(B) and FIG. 11-104(K) to FIG. 11-105(N), during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is The lighting at the brightness C2 and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are completed. Then, as a movable body motion suggestion performance, the movable body motion is suggested based on the fact that the movable body 32 repeatedly reciprocates between the retreat position and the suggested position a predetermined number of times (four reciprocations in this modification example 135SG-2) by a drive mechanism (not shown). The performance ends. In addition, during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion production, the output of the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion production is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. Note that the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect is a sound effect that allows the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retracted position and the suggested position (for example, a sound effect such as "rattle"). ) etc. can be output.

After the movable body motion suggestion production ends, the whiteout period ends and the movable body motion production begins, as shown in Figure 11-90 (B) and Figures 11-106 (O) to 11-106 (P). As a result, the movable body 32 is moved from the retracted position to the presentation position by a drive mechanism (not shown). In addition, during the period of the movable body movement performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are set to brightness C1 in a manner corresponding to the movable body movement performance. Light. Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 11-90(B), the speakers 8L and 8R output sound corresponding to the moving body motion effect at the volume V1 (see FIG. 11-106(P)). Note that, as the sound corresponding to the movable body movement effect in the feature section 135SG, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "Zudoon") that allows the player to recognize that the movable body has moved may be output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-107(Q), the movable body motion performance ends based on the movable body 32 returning from the performance position to the retracted position. As shown in FIG. 11-90(B), FIG. 11-107(Q), and FIG. 11-107(R), from the timing when the movable body motion effect and whiteout are finished, the image display device 5 displays super reach. At the same time as the reach effect of β starts, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable lamp 9d, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F start to light up at a brightness C1 corresponding to the reach effect. , the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting sound corresponding to the reach effect corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach β. In addition, as for the reach effect sound corresponding to the reach effect of Super Reach β, the sound corresponding to the variable display and the reach effect of Super Reach α are available so that the player can recognize that the reach effect of Super Reach β is in progress. It is sufficient to output BGM or the like that is different from the reach performance compatible sound corresponding to the performance.

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-2, in the variable display of super reach, which is the target of the winning flash effect, before the start of the super reach reach effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is set to brightness C2 and cycle T2. From the start timing of the super reach effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F lights up at a brightness of C2. In other words, when the reach effect starts, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F lights up at a brightness of C2 and Instead of blinking at the period T2, the light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-reach effect (lighting up at a brightness of C2), so the game enjoyment of the ready-to-reach effect can be improved.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 11-96(K) to 11-98(O) and FIGS. 11-104(K) to 11-106(O), the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (whiteout). At the same time, during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is then turned on at brightness C2 from the start timing of the Super Reach reach effect. Since it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to a change in the light emission mode of the lamp 135SG009F, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if the variable display that is the target of the flash effect when winning a prize is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach β, the movable body movement suggestion effect will be executed during the whiteout period, and the movable body movement suggestion effect will be executed. The winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off in response to the execution of , and then, in response to the execution of the movable body movement effect (movement of the movable body 32 to the effect position), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is set to the movable body movement effect. It lights up at brightness C1 in a corresponding manner. In other words, since the lighting mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning a prize is turned on at a brightness of C1 after turning off due to the execution of the movable object motion suggestion effect, it is important to note that these changes in the lighting mode may give a sense of discomfort to the player. Since it can be prevented, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, in the feature section 135SG, a form in which a dialogue preview performance can be executed as a preview performance suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot during variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , as modification example 135SG-3, the preview performance includes, in addition to the speech preview performance, the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes in stages, and the expectation of a jackpot depending on the final number of change stages. It may also be possible to perform a step-up effect with different degrees, a group preview effect in which a plurality of characters cross the image display device 5, or the like.

In particular, when it is possible to perform a step-up effect as the modified example 135SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 11-108 (A), 11-109 (A) to 11-113 (L), when winning When executing a step-up effect during a variable display in which a flash effect is not being executed, the timing for displaying an image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 or the timing for changing the image in stages is determined for the winning flash. The effect of the step-up performance may be enhanced by temporarily lighting the lamp 135SG009F at a brightness of C2. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-108(B) and FIG. 11-114(A) to FIG. 11-118(F), the step-up effect is executed during the variable display where the winning flash effect is being executed. At this time, since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has already been flashed at the brightness C2 and the period T2, the timing for displaying the image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 and the image are changed step by step. The winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not turned on at the right timing. In other words, while the winning flash effect is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is already emitting light in a manner corresponding to the winning flash effect, is turned on in response to the step-up effect. In some embodiments, the light may not be emitted.

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-3, when the step-up effect is started in the variable display during execution of the winning flash effect, that is, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has already been set to the brightness C2 as the winning flash effect. In addition, if a step-up effect that lights up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F while it is blinking at cycle T2 is started, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect is executed with priority. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from starting at an inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the winning flash performance in a manner corresponding to the step-up performance.

Furthermore, in the feature section 135SG, the movable body 32 is not operated before the start of the super reach reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and before the start of the super reach reach effect, the movable body 32 is not operated. In this case, it is possible to perform a movable body movement performance in which the movable body 32 is moved from a retracted position (for example, a position above the image display device 5) to a performance position (for example, a center front position when viewed from the front of the image display device 5). By doing so, it may be possible to notify the player that the super reach effect will be executed.

In this way, if it is possible to execute the movable body motion performance before the reach performance of super reach, as shown in FIGS. 11-119(A) and 11-119(B) as modification 135SG-4, When the winning flash effect is executed for the variable display of the super reach, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect. The expected level of jackpot may be made to differ depending on which light emission mode is changed depending on the reach performance of the super reach.

For example, as shown in Figure 11-119(C), if the variable display result of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is a jackpot, at the start of the variable display, the movable body From the start timing of the movement performance, it was decided to change the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect, and the reach effect started at a rate of 30%. From the timing, it is decided to change the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach effect. If the variable display result of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is a loss, at the start of the variable display, from the movable body movement effect start timing, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F It has been decided to change the lighting mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect, and at a rate of 70%, from the start timing of the reach effect, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. It is decided to change the light emission mode from a mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to a light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect.

In addition, if it is decided to change the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect or the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach effect, the said decision. The winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be controlled in accordance with the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer in accordance with the progress of the variable display.

As described above, in this modification example 135SG-4, depending on the timing of ending the light emitting mode according to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, it is possible to determine whether the flash is in progress during the execution period of the movable body movement effect or when the super In some cases, it may be during the execution period of the reach effect of Reach, so it is necessary to check whether the flash effect at the time of winning will end during the execution period of the moving body movement effect or during the execution period of the reach effect of Super Reach. It can be easily recognized by people. In particular, as shown in FIG. 11-119(C), the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the start timing of the movable body motion performance to the corresponding movable body motion performance. Since the expectation level of a jackpot is different depending on whether the flash mode is set according to the start timing of the reach effect or when the light emission mode is set according to the reach effect from the start timing of the reach effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the end timing of the flash effect when winning a prize. This allows players to increase their interest in gaming.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-4, the timing at which the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends (changes to the light emission mode according to the movable body movement effect or the light emission mode according to the reach effect). Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game can be played according to the timing when the winning flash lamp 135SG009F finishes flashing as the winning flash effect. It may also be possible to suggest the setting values set in the device 1. By doing so, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the end timing of the winning flash performance, and to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-4, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light either at the start of the movable body movement performance during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance or at the start of the super reach reach performance. The mode can be changed, and the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body motion performance from the start timing of the movable body motion performance. Since the expectation level of a jackpot differs depending on the start timing of the reach effect and the lighting mode corresponding to the reach effect, the player pays attention to the effect that is executed at the timing when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-4, in the variable display of super reach, a form in which a movable body movement effect can be executed before the start of the reach effect of super reach is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, before the execution of the movable body motion performance, a movable body motion suggestion performance that suggests the execution of the movable body motion performance may be made possible. In this way, when it is possible to execute the movable body motion suggestion effect before executing the movable body motion effect, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to suggest the movable body motion. A case is provided in which the light emission mode is changed from the start timing of the performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion display, and the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode according to the winning flash display to the movable body motion suggestion display. The jackpot expectation level may be different depending on the case where the light emission mode is set according to the movable body motion suggestion performance from the start timing and the case where the light emission mode is set according to the ready-to-reach performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the performance that is being executed when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this modified example 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement suggestion effect from the start timing of the movable body movement suggestion effect. Although the example shows a form in which the jackpot expectation level is different depending on the case where the light emission mode is set according to the reach effect from the start timing of the reach effect, this invention is not limited to this, and the invention is not limited to this. The light emission (blinking) of the time flash lamp 135SG009F is set to end at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and at the start timing of the reach effect. The expectation level of the jackpot may be set to differ depending on whether the game ends at . In this way, even when providing multiple timings for stopping the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect during the variable display of 1, the effect control CPU 120 may cause the winning flash to occur due to the generation of static electricity, etc. If it is not possible to stop the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, at the end timing of the variable display (timing of receiving the symbol confirmation command), which is a timing later than these timings, the late prize winning including the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will be resumed. All you have to do is end the flash effect.

By doing this, even if the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash performance cannot be stopped at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion performance or the start timing of the reach-to-win performance, the winning flash performance will continue. At the end timing of the target variable display, it is possible to end the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter half, including the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning.

In addition, in the characteristic section 135SG, as display patterns for specific displays (pending display and active display), a display pattern α having the lowest jackpot expectation level is a white round shape, and a blue color display pattern having a higher jackpot expectation level than the display pattern α. The display pattern β is a round shape, and the display pattern γ is a red circle shape with a higher jackpot expectation than the display pattern β. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As the display pattern, display patterns other than these display patterns α to γ may be provided.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-120 as modified example 135SG-5, the display pattern of the specific display includes, in addition to the above-mentioned display patterns α to display pattern γ, any one of the pending display or the active display. Display pattern δ, which is a round shape with blinking white color, may change to display pattern β or display pattern γ at the timing of display pattern β or display pattern γ (low expectation of change to display pattern β or display pattern γ) The possibility of changing to display pattern β or display pattern γ at any timing during display is higher than display pattern δ (expectation level of change to display pattern β or display pattern γ: high) A certain character-shaped circle A display pattern ε may be provided.

In other words, among display patterns α to γ of the pending display and active display in Modified Example 135SG-5, display pattern γ (red display) has the highest jackpot expectation, display pattern α (white display) ) is set to have the lowest jackpot expectation. On the other hand, regarding the jackpot expectation of display pattern δ and display pattern ε when display pattern β and display pattern γ do not change, the jackpot expectation may be set lower than display pattern α, or lower than display pattern α. Also, the jackpot expectation level may be set to be higher than that of the display pattern β, and the jackpot expectation level may be set lower than that of the display pattern β.

Further, in this modification example 135SG-5, display patterns δ and display patterns ε, which can change to display patterns β and display patterns γ, are provided as display patterns for hold display and active display. The display pattern α is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the display pattern α changes to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a lower rate than the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε. Furthermore, there may be a case where the display pattern β is changed to the display pattern γ for the pending display or active display.

Furthermore, the feature section 135SG determines whether or not to execute a pending display preview effect (a display that displays a pending display or an active display in display pattern β or display pattern β) and the display pattern, as well as determining whether to execute a flash effect when winning a prize. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. You may decide.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-120 as the above-mentioned modification 135SG-5, if it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning time, the display mode of the pending display or active display based on the starting winning is , the display pattern ε is determined at the highest rate, the display pattern δ is determined at a lower rate than the display pattern ε, the display pattern γ is determined at a lower rate than the display pattern δ, and the display pattern β is determined at a lower rate than the display pattern γ. It is sufficient to determine the display pattern α at a low ratio and determine the display pattern α at the lowest ratio (determination ratio of the display pattern when deciding to execute the flash effect at the time of winning: display pattern ε > display pattern δ > display pattern γ > display pattern β > Display pattern α).

As described above, display patterns α to display patterns ε are provided as display modes for specific displays (hold display and active display), and when a specific display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the specific display is displayed. Since there is a higher probability that the winning flash effect is executed at the same time than when pattern β or display pattern γ is displayed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to a specific display by executing the winning flash effect, and also to draw the player's attention to the specific display. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the display changes from the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the display pattern α is a display pattern in which a specific display is displayed in a white circle, the display pattern β is a display pattern in which a specific display is displayed in a blue circle, and the display pattern γ is a display pattern in which a specific display is displayed in a red circle. Since the display pattern δ is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a blinking white circle, the player can easily identify the difference in the specific display by the display color or blinking mode.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-5, when a specific display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is changed to display pattern β or display depending on whether or not the winning flash effect is executed. Although the rate at which the pattern changes to pattern γ is not described, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a specific display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, a flash effect is displayed at the time of winning. The rate at which the display pattern of the specific display changes to display pattern β or display pattern γ may vary depending on whether or not the specific display is being executed. By doing this, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. can.

Incidentally, in this modification example 135SG-5, a display pattern δ that flashes in white is exemplified as a special aspect of the specific display in this invention, but this invention is not limited to this, and the specific display in this invention is not limited to this. The special mode (display pattern δ) may be a color other than white, blue, or red (for example, purple or black), which are the normal mode or special mode of the specific display in the present invention.

Further, in this modification example 135SG-5, a mode is exemplified in which the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ to suggest that the specific display changes to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. The invention is not limited to this, but it may be possible to perform an action effect that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ. .

In particular, in the case of an action presentation, multiple presentation modes (with different ratios of changing the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ) may be used as the presentation mode of the action presentation. For example, a first effect that can change a specific display displayed in display pattern δ to display pattern β or display pattern γ by acting on a specific display displayed in display pattern δ, and an effect that has a different presentation mode from the first effect and effect. A second effect effect is provided that can change the specific display to display pattern β or display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect effect by acting on the specific display displayed in display pattern δ. When the second effect is executed, the winning flash effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the first effect is executed.

By doing this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the effect is executed as the first effect or the second effect, and by executing the flash effect at the time of winning, the effect is changed to the second effect. It is possible to increase expectations for what will be carried out in the action presentation.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the flash effect is executed at a higher rate when winning a prize than when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ. is high, so if a specific display is displayed in display pattern ε and a flash effect is executed at the time of winning, the player will be discouraged by the change in the display pattern of the specific display to display pattern β or display pattern γ. Since the player can attract attention, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the modification 135SG-5, a display pattern ε for displaying a character is provided as a display pattern for a specific display (suspended display and active display), and an action effect is executed for the character as the specific display. Although the embodiment in which the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible that the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ by acting on another character as a result of the effect.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 11-121 (A) and 11-121 (B), when the number of 1st special symbols reserved is 3 and is being displayed in a variable manner, a prize is entered in the 1st starting slot. (starting prize) occurs, and when the display pattern of the pending display based on the starting winning is determined to be the display pattern ε as a pending display preview effect based on the starting winning, the fourth block of the first pending storage display area 135SG005D An ally character is displayed as a pending display, and the active display displayed in the active display area 135SG005A changes to an enemy character (see FIG. 11-121 (B-1)).

In this state, the variable display ends and a new variable display starts, that is, as shown in FIGS. 11-122(A) and 11-122(B), When an ally character (suspended display of display pattern ε) moves from the display position of the fourth suspended display to the display position of the third suspended display, the ally character moves from the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. Act (shoot) against.

Then, each time the variable display ends and a new variable display starts, that is, as shown in FIGS. 11-122(C) and 11-122(D), When the ally character displayed in the first hold memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the third hold display to the display position of the second hold display, the ally character displayed in the first hold memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the third hold display to the display position of the second hold display. When moving from the display position of the display to the display position of the first suspended display, the friendly character acts (shoots) at the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A.

Furthermore, when the variable display ends and the variable display that is the target of the pending display preview effect starts, the ally character displayed at the display position of the first pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed as active. The player moves to area 135SG005A, and the ally character acts directly on the enemy character within the active display area 135SG005A (a battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character is executed).

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-123 (G) and 11-123 (H), if the ally character wins as a result of the battle performance, the ally character is displayed in the display pattern β or in the active display area 135SG005A. The display changes to active display of display pattern γ. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-123 (I) and 11-123 (J), if the ally character is defeated as a result of the battle performance, the enemy character or ally character is displayed in the display pattern in the active display area 135SG005A. Changes to active display of α.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-6, when displaying a pending display in display pattern ε, an ally character as a pending display in the display pattern ε defeats an enemy character in active display area 135SG005A, and the active display is performed. Although we have exemplified a form in which the ally character that has become ``can be changed to an active display in display pattern β or display pattern γ, this invention is not limited to this, and when displaying a pending display in display pattern ε, By defeating the enemy character while the pending display is being displayed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D, the friendly character serving as the pending display may be changed to the pending display of display pattern β or display pattern γ.

In addition, when displaying a pending display in display pattern ε, when a winning flash effect is executed at the same time, the display pattern ε is displayed at a higher rate than when a winning flash effect is not executed. may be changeable to a pending display (or an active display) of display pattern β or display pattern γ. By doing this, not only can the player's attention be drawn to the battle result between the friendly character and the enemy character as a pending display of the display pattern ε, but also the winning flash effect can be executed while the battle is being executed. Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether there is a player or not, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the modified example 135SG-5 and the modified example 135SG-6, the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε are added to the display patterns α to γ described in the feature section 135SG as display patterns for the hold display and the active display. , but when displaying a hold display or an active display using these display patterns δ or display pattern ε, it is the same as when displaying a hold display or an active display using display patterns α to display patterns γ. Then, specific display start effect A or specific display start effect B may be executed.

More specifically, when displaying a hold display or an active display in the display pattern δ, execute the specific display start effect A (see Figure 11-19) as in the case of the display pattern α, and display the hold display or active display. When displaying with display pattern ε, as in the case of display pattern β and display pattern γ, specific display start effect B (see Figure 11-20) or the period during which the pending display or active display is completed is the specific display start. A specific display start effect that is longer than the effect A and shorter than the specific display start effect B may be executed. By doing this, when displaying a pending display or an active display in the display pattern δ or display pattern ε, similarly to the feature section 135SG, from a timing before the display of the pending display or active display is completed. , the player will be able to recognize the winning flash effect sound and the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F.

Further, in the feature section 135SG, as an example of a winning flash effect, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 along with the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a modification 135SG-7, the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed in stages according to the progress of the winning flash effect.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-124(A) and 11-124(B), when the winning ( When a winning (starting prize) occurs and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, as shown in Figure 11-124(B), The performance begins.

First, as shown in FIG. 11-124(B), as for the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning starts from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (V1>V2). , the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-125(C) and 11-125(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5, and the winning flash Blinking control of the lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the cycle T1 is started. In the blinking control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

In addition, when the first period winning flash effect is started, as shown in Figure 11-125 (D), Figure 11-126 (E), and Figure 11-126 (F), as the above-mentioned specific display start effect B, An animation in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is blink-controlled, is displayed, and an animation in which the character A moves to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D is displayed. After the character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed (if it is the main characteristic part 135SG, the fourth pending display is displayed). An animation that attacks (acts on) the position where the display is displayed is displayed.

After character A acts on the first pending storage display area 135SG005D, the pending display that is the target of the winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) that is currently being executed appears gradually from the bottom to the top at the position where the action occurred. An appearance animation is displayed (see Figures 11-20 (D-1) to 11-20 (D-5)). Note that the pending display whose appearance animation has been completed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display as a specific display rotating display effect like other pending displays.

When the first-term winning flash performance ends, the second-term winning flash performance starts from the end timing. As for the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half, as shown in Figures 11-127 (G) and 11-127 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning starts from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2. , the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and cycle T2 (cycle T2>cycle T1), and the game effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y blink at the brightness C2 and cycle T2 (Figure 11- 27(A) to blinking in the manner shown in FIGS. 11-27(D)), the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals. Ru.

Incidentally, the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 is performed in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image) A gradation using blue-based colors, a gradation using red-based colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.) are performed.

The cycle T2, which is the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-mentioned cycle T1, but shorter than the above-mentioned cycle T0 (lamp blinking cycle length: T0>T2). >T1). Incidentally, during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 11-128(I) and 11-128(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the transparent black image 135SG005B overlappingly displayed over the entire area of one display area 135SG005F.

As shown in FIG. 11-128 (J), FIG. 11-129 (K), and FIG. 11-129 (L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the image display device 5 displays decorative symbols and small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late winning in this modification 135SG-7 is executed regardless of whether or not it is the symbol confirmation period. That is, as shown in FIG. 11-128 (J), even during the symbol confirmation period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R are When winning a prize, a sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at volume V2.

When the symbol confirmation period ends, a new variable display starts. At this time, in the image display device 5, the pending display displayed at the beginning in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D is moved to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display, and is also displayed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted to the right one by one. Furthermore, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is also started.

In addition, in this variable display, as shown in FIG. 11-129(K) and FIG. 11-129(L), the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed together with the black image 135SG005B on the image display device 5 is larger than the previous variable display. may be displayed. In this way, by displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S larger than the previous variable display, the silhouette image is displayed overlappingly in the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in FIG. 11-130(M) and FIG. 11-130(N), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the decorative symbol and the small symbol 135SG005M are displayed in the combination indicating a miss on the image display device 5. At the same time, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Even during the symbol confirmation period, the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 11-130(N), even during the symbol confirmation period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly. In particular, the silhouette image 135SG005S is also displayed overlappingly with the active display area 135SG005A. Further, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at a volume of V2.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, it is possible to display either of two silhouette images 135SG005S of different sizes as the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning, and a large-sized silhouette can be displayed. When the image 135SG005S is displayed, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A are displayed in an overlapping manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the large-sized silhouette image 135SG005S The active display area 135SG005A may be displayed in an overlapping manner only when the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect is executed. By doing this, the player can easily recognize the variable display corresponding to the flash effect when winning, and the active display area 135SG005A, that is, the active display corresponding to the flash effect when winning, is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S. Therefore, it is possible to provide surprise to the players and improve their interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, silhouette images 135SG005S of different sizes can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect when winning a prize, and depending on the size of the displayed silhouette image 135SG005S, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active Since the overlapping aspect with the display area 135SG005A is different, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5, there are cases in which the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap and cases in which they do not overlap. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the overlapping area of the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 (for example, when the active display area 135SG005A is A case where only a part of the area 135SG005A overlaps with the silhouette image 135SG005S, a case where the entire active display area 135SG005A overlaps with the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc. may be provided.

Further, in the present modification example 135SG-7, there is a case in which the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5. However, before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts, it overlaps with the pending display that is the target of the winning flash effect that is displayed in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D. The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap with the active display displayed in the active display area 135SG005A, which is the target of the winning flash effect, while the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is being executed. A silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed. By doing this, the player can easily recognize the pending display and active display that correspond to the flash effect when winning a prize, and the silhouette image 135SG005S hides not only the pending display but also the active display. It is possible to improve the game's interest by adding even more surprise to the game.

In addition, although this modified example 135SG-7 exemplifies a form in which only one of the pending display and the active display is hidden by displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a case may be provided in which both the pending display and the active display are hidden by the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, a form is exemplified in which the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning can be displayed overlappingly in the active display area 135SG005A and the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the winning flash effect as exemplified in the feature section 135SG, when the decorative pattern temporarily stops, The silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect when winning a prize may be displayed overlappingly on the special symbol (see FIG. 11-40, etc.) that stops in the decorative symbol display area 5C. By doing so, the special symbol for notifying the temporary stop is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect when winning a prize, so that it is possible to give surprise to the player and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, as a re-variable display performance in this invention, a form in which the special symbol stops in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a re-variable display effect, an image different from the special symbol may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning may be displayed overlapping with the image.

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, if a starting winning at the first starting opening occurs during the execution of the reach effect of Super Reach, execution of the winning flash effect based on the starting winning is not determined (determined to be non-executable). Although the present invention is not limited to this example, as a modified example 135SG-8, if a starting winning occurs in the first starting opening while the variable display is being executed, the variable display The remaining period may be specified, and if the specified period is less than the execution period of the winning flash effect in the previous period, execution of the winning flash effect may not be determined (determined not to be executed). By doing this, the winning flash effect (previous period winning flash effect) is executed when the remaining period of the variable display is short, such as when the execution period of the winning flash effect is shorter than the execution period of the winning flash effect. It is possible to prevent the specific display (pending display or active display) of the target of the performance from becoming difficult to understand.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-8, a mode is exemplified in which it is determined whether or not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning a prize based on the remaining period of the variable display and the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period. is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute the flash effect when winning a prize depends on the remaining period of the variable display and the period other than the execution period of the flash effect when winning the previous period (for example, a period of 5 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.) ) may be used as a criterion.

Furthermore, in this modification example 135SG-8, if a starting winning occurs at the first starting opening while the variable display is being executed, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period. Although the embodiment is exemplified in which the execution of the winning flash effect is not determined if the specified period is less than or equal to the execution period of the winning flash effect, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, it may be possible to perform a winning flash effect from the start timing of the next variable display, provided that the variable display result of the variable display is a loss. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the super reach reach effect and the winning flash effect from becoming less interesting due to the overlap of the super reach effect and the winning flash effect.

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect is blinking at a brightness C1 and a cycle T1 (the light emitting mode in the previous winning flash effect), and a blinking mode with a brightness C2 and a cycle T2. There are two lighting modes: blinking (lighting mode in the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half). On the other hand, the light emission mode of the starting port lamp 135SG009S in the starting port lamp lighting effect includes blue light emission at a brightness C2 according to the display pattern β, and red light emission at a brightness C2 according to the display pattern γ. It is provided. In other words, the feature section 135SG exemplifies a form in which the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect is the same as the number of light emission modes of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S in the starting gate lamp light emission effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-9, the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect and the light emission of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the starting lamp light emission effect. The number of aspects may be different.

In particular, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-5, display patterns δ and display patterns ε are provided as display patterns for the hold display and active display, and these display patterns δ are used as the light emission mode of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S in the starting gate lamp light emission effect. By providing a light emitting mode according to the display pattern ε, the number of light emitting modes of the starting port lamp 135SG009S in the starting port lamp light emission effect can be set to be greater than the number of light emitting modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect. good. By doing this, the variation in the light emission of the starting port lamp 135SG009S increases, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the feature section 135SG, an example has been exemplified in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is made to emit light as a winning flash effect, and the starting gate lamp 135SG009S is made to emit light in a starting door lamp light emission effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 135SG-10, the light emitting area where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as a winning flash effect may be set larger than the light emitting area where the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S emits light as a starting exit lamp light emitting performance. good.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11-28, in the case where it is decided to execute both the winning flash effect and the pending display notice effect based on the starting winning, the winning flashing lamp 135SG009F is activated when the starting winning occurs. On the other hand, the starting gate lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the ready-to-win display on the variable display that is the target of the starting winning flash display, while the starting gate lamp 135SG009S flashes the variable display that is the subject of the pending display notice display after the starting winning occurs. Since the light is emitted until the end of the variable display (which is the target of the flash effect), by applying the modified example 135SG-10, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will emit light in accordance with the winning flash effect for an excessively long time. It is possible to maintain the player's expectation that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state by the light emitting mode of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S, while preventing a decrease in gaming interest due to the above.

Further, in the characteristic part 135SG, a mode in which the starting lamp 135SG009S emits light without blinking is illustrated as the starting lamp lighting effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the starting lamp 135SG009S is not limited to this. The mouth lamp 135SG009S may be blinked. Furthermore, when the starting port lamp 135SG009S is blinked as the starting port lamp light emission effect in this way, the blinking cycle of the starting port lamp 135SG009S is set to the blinking period (period T2) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect. It may be different. In this way, by making the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F different from the blinking cycle of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S, players pay attention to both the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the feature section 135SG has a mode in which the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, etc. are temporarily turned off when a flash effect is executed at the time of winning. Although shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-11, when performing a flash effect at the time of winning, the brightness of the backlight etc. built in the image display device 5 is The winning flash effect may be started after the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is lowered by lowering the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5. In this manner, when the winning flash effect is executed, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced to make it easier for the player to recognize the start of the winning flash effect.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-11, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced by reducing the brightness of the backlight etc. built into the image display device 5, that is, the image display Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the image display device 5 is changed to a low visibility state in which visibility is lower than the previous state by changing the brightness of the device 5, the present invention is not limited to this. Forms of reducing the visibility of the image displayed on the display device 5 include, in addition to reducing the 5 luminance (brightness) of the image display device, temporarily stopping display of the image on the image display device 5; The movable body 32 is moved in front of the image display device 5, the image display device 5 itself is moved repeatedly in the vertical direction, etc., and the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is increased to relatively display the image on the image display device 5. It may also be something that reduces the visibility of the image being displayed.

In other words, a "low visibility state" in the present invention is a state in which the visibility on the image display device 5 is lower than the immediately previous state, and is defined by a method other than reducing the brightness of the image display device 5. Contains images that reduce visibility.

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 11-28, when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect in response to a starting winning, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is started from the speakers 8L and 8R. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started after the winning flash is started, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-12, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking in response to the starting winning. If it is decided to execute, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display is completed. It's okay. By doing this, it is possible for the player to quickly recognize that a starting winning has occurred and that the execution of the winning flash effect has been decided by the blinking (light emission) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. You can improve your interest in gaming.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-12, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display is completed. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the winning flash effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a hold display is displayed. An appearance animation of the active display may be started.

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 11-28, during the execution period of the first period winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R output the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect at the volume V1, The lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the period T1, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period, the volume of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R is executed. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the output at V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed, the present invention is not limited to this. Rather, as a modified example 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the second term, when the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning the award is started, it is the same as during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term. , Outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect by the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, blinking the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C1 and cycle T1, and temporarily displaying the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5. You may. By doing this, even during the execution period of the flash performance when winning a prize in the second half, the sound corresponding to the flash performance when winning a prize is output at the volume V1 from speakers 8L and 8R, as in the flash performance when winning a prize in the first half, and the sound for the flash performance when winning a prize is output at volume V1. By flashing the lamp 135SG009F at a brightness C1 and a cycle T1 and displaying the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5, the player recognizes that the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect will start. Since it is easy to play, it can improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the second period winning flash effect, when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started, the same as during the execution period of the first period winning flash effect, The speakers 8L and 8R temporarily output the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1, the flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the cycle T1 at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started during the execution period of the winning flash effect in the later period, the winning time flash effect by the speakers 8L and 8R is Execute only one or two of the following: outputting a sound compatible with flash effects at volume V1, blinking flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C1 and period T1 when winning a prize, and displaying effect image 135SG005E on image display device 5. You can do it like this.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 of this specification has a jackpot probability that differs depending on the set value (FIGS. 1 to 9), a pending display notice effect based on a starting win, and a flash effect at the time of winning. It is executable and the lighting mode changes as a winning flash effect depending on the lamp (characteristic section 135SG, Figures 11-1 to 11-68), and during the winning pattern determination period, the winning flash effect (Modified Example 135SG-1, Figures 11-69 to 11-89), it is possible to perform super reach reach performances with different jackpot expectations, and the movable body movement is performed before the reach production with high jackpot expectations. If the performance can be executed and the movable body movement performance is executed, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the start timing of the movable body movement performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement performance. (Modification 2, Figures 11-90 to 11-107), the step-up effect can be executed during variable display, and if the step-up effect is executed when the winning flash effect is not executed, the winning flash While the lamp 135SG009F for the winning flash emits light in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect, if the step-up effect is executed while the winning flash effect is being executed, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed to the winning flash effect. One that does not change from the corresponding light emission mode (Modified Example 135SG-3, Figures 11-108 to 11-118), it is possible to perform a movable body movement performance before the start of the reach performance of Super Reach, and the lamp for flashing when winning a prize. When the light emitting mode of 135SG009F changes from the light emitting mode according to the flash effect when winning a prize to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect from the start timing of the movable body movement effect, and from the start timing of the reach effect to the light emitting mode according to the reach effect. The jackpot expectation level differs depending on the lighting mode (Modified Example 135SG-4, Figure 11-119), and display patterns α to ε are provided as display modes for pending display and active display. The rate of which display pattern is determined as the display pattern of the pending display or the active display is different depending on the execution of the winning flash effect due to winning a prize (Modification 135SG-5, Figure 11- 120), when the display pattern ε is determined as the display pattern of the hold display, the display pattern ε changes to any of the display patterns α to γ according to the execution of the action effect (Modification 135SG- 6, Fig. 11-121 to Fig. 11-123), the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 changes according to the progress of the flash effect at the time of winning (Modification 135SG-7, Fig. 11-124 to FIG. 11-130), etc., but the pachinko game machine of the present invention may be implemented by combining two or more of these plurality of features and modifications. good.

Furthermore, in the feature section 135SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as a game machine that plays a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game machine that plays a predetermined game is defined as a game machine that plays at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, it may be a slot machine or a general game machine as long as it performs the following.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 CPU for production control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a movable body that is operable;
A light emitting means capable of emitting light;
a display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
Effect execution means capable of executing a specific display effect of displaying the specific display and a specific light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
A specific effect that notifies the result of the variable display by operating the movable object, and a suggestion that the specific effect is executed by operating the movable object before the specific effect is executed. It is possible to perform and,
performing the specific light emitting effect so that the light emission of the light emitting means is recognizable to the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect;
The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed,
The gaming machine is
Even during the variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, the light emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, and at a predetermined ending timing before the variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect ends. It is possible to control the effect to end the light emission,
If the light emission of the light emitting means in the manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect is not terminated at the predetermined end timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event, the light emitting means may emit light at a specific end timing subsequent to the predetermined end timing. Perform special termination control to terminate the
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images